Project Manual
PROGRESS SET
MISSION CROSSING 3121 WESTPOINTE DRIVE NEW BRAUNFELS, TEXAS 78132
December 2016
Owner GREY FOREST DEVELOPMENT, LLC 3600 Bee Caves Road, Ste. 200 Austin, TX 78746
Developer GREY FOREST DEVELOPMENT, LLC 3600 Bee Caves Road, Ste. 200 Austin, TX 78746
Sage Architecture Project No. 014010.60
Sage Architecture, Inc. 6106 Broadway San Antonio, Texas 78209 (210) 493-3747 / 493-3749 FAX
©COPYRIGHT – THESE DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN PREPARED SPECIFICALLY FOR THE PROJECT SHOWN. THEY ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS OR IN OTHER LOCATIONS WITHOUT THE APPROVAL AND PARTICIPATION OF SAGE ARCHITECTURE, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. SECTION 00002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL INFORMATION
A-0.0 COVER SHEET A-0.2 CODE ANALYSIS AND OTHER INFORMATION A-0.3 LEGEND A-0.4 ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS
CIVIL
C1.0 COVER C1.1 CURRENT PLAT C2.0 WRAP SITE PLAN SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN C2.1 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL NARRATIVE C3.0 DIMENSIONAL CONTROL AND SITE PLAN I C3.1 DIMENSIONAL CONTROL AND SITE PLAN II C4.0 FLATWORK DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN I C4.1 FLATWORK DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN II C4.2 FLATWORK DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN III C4.3 FLATWORK DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN IV C4.4 FLATWORK DIMENSIONAL CONTROL PLAN V C5.0 PAVING PLAN I C5.1 PAVING PLAN II C6.0 JOINT PLAN I C6.1 JOINT PLAN II C7.0 OVERALL UTILITY PLAN C8.0 FIRE PROTECTION SITE PLAN C9.0 WATER COVER C9.1 OVERALL WATER DISTRIBUTION PLAN C9.2 WATER DISTRIBUTION STANDARD DETAILS C10.0 SANITARY SEWER COVER SHEET C10.1 SCS SITE PLAN AND OVERALL SANITARY SEWER SITE PLAN C10.2 LINE “A” C10.3 LINE “B” AND LINE “C” C10.4 SANITARY SEWER STANDARD DETAILS C11.0 GRADING PLAN I C11.1 GRADING PLAN II C11.2 GRADING PLAN III C11.3 GRADING PLAN IV C11.4 GRADING PLAN V C12.0 DRAINAGE PLAN C13.0 SITE DETAILS
ARCHITECTURAL
A-1.1 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN & UNIT MATRIX
A-2.1 BUILDING TYPE I & II FLOOR PLANS A-2.2 BUILDING TYPE III FLOOR PLANS A-2.3 BUILDING TYPE IV FLOOR PLANS
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 SECTION 00002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS
A-2.4 POOL EQUIP. BLDG - OVERALL DIM., FINISH & CLEAR. FLR. PLANS A-2.5 TEAL BUILDING -OVERALL DIM., FINISH & CLEAR. FLR. PLANS & EXT. ELEV. A-2.6 CABANA BUILDING PLAN AND EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-3.0 UNIT GENERAL INFORMATION A-3.1 UNIT A-1, CLEARANCE, FLR FINISH PLANS & INT. ELEVS. A-3.2 UNIT B-1, CLEARANCE, FLR FINISH PLANS & INT. ELEVS. A-3.3 UNIT C-1, CLEARANCE, FLR FINISH PLANS & INT. ELEVS.
A-4.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS - UNITS & BUILDINGS A-4.2 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS - POOL EQUIP. BLDG, TEAL & CABANA
A-5.1 DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULE - APTS. / ACCESSORY BLDGS A-5.2 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS - APTS. / ACCESSORY BLDGS
A-6.1 BLDG. TYPE I - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS / SECTIONS / ROOF PLAN A-6.2 BLDG. TYPE II - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS / ROOF PLAN A-6.3 BLDG. TYPES II, III, & IV - SECTIONS A-6.4 BLDG. TYPE II – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.5 BLDG. TYPE II – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.6 BLDG. TYPE II – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.7 BLDG. TYPE III - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS / ROOF PLAN A-6.8 BLDG. TYPE III – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.9 BLDG. TYPE III – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.10 BLDG. TYPE IV - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS / ROOF PLAN A-6.11 BLDG. TYPE IV – BLDG. SECTIONS A-6.12 POOL EQUIP. BLDG. - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS / ROOF PLAN
A-7.1 APARTMENT BUILDING SECTIONS AND DETAILS A-7.2 APARTMENT BUILDING SECTIONS AND DETAILS A-7.3 ACCESSORY BUILDING SECTIONS AND DETAILS A-7.4 CABANA SECTIONS AND DETAILS A-7.5 CABANA SECTIONS AND DETAILS
A-8.1 STAIR ELEVATIONS / SECTIONS / DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
S0-0 COVER SHEET & DRAWING INDEX
S0-1 GENERAL NOTES S0-2 GENERAL NOTES S0-3 SCHEDULES NOTES S0-4 SCHEDULES NOTES S0-5 NAILING SCHEDULE AND NOTES S0-6 INSPECTIONS
S1-0 STRUCTURAL SITE PLAN
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 SECTION 00002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS
S1-1 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT/SLAB TENDON/SLAB FORMING PLAN – BUILDING TYPE I S1-2 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT/SLAB TENDON PLAN - BUILDING TYPE II S1-2S FOUNDATION SLAB FORMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE II S1-3 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT/SLAB TENDON PLAN - BUILDING TYPE III S1-3S FOUNDATION SLAB FORMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE III S1-4 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT/SLAB TENDON PLAN - BUILDING TYPE IV S1-4S FOUNDATION SLAB FORMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE IV
S2-1 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE I & II S2-2 2ND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN AND LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE III AND IV
S3-1 1ST FLOOR SHEARWALL & 2ND FLOOR SHEARWALL PLAN - BUILDING TYPE I & II S3-2 1ST FLOOR SHEARWALL & 2ND FLOOR SHEARWALL PLAN - BUILDING TYPE III & IV
S4-1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE I & II S4-2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN - BUILDING TYPE III & IV
S5-1 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT, FOUNDATION SLAB TENDON, SLAB FORMING, SHEARWALL AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS - POOL EQUIPMENT BLDG. S5-2 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT, FOUNDATION SLAB TENDON, SLAB FORMING, SHEARWALL AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS - CABANA BLDG. S5-3 FOUNDATION BEAM LAYOUT, FOUNDATION SLAB TENDON, SLAB FORMING, SHEARWALL AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS - TEAL BLDG.
S6-1 FOUNDATION/SECTIONS AND DETAILS - DUMPSTER
S7-1 LANDSCAPE SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SD1-1 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD1-2 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD2-1 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD2-2 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD3-1 SHEARWALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD3-2 SHEARWALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS SD4-1 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS
MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING
MP0.00 MECHANICAL/PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES MP1.01 SITE PLAN - MECH/PLBG MP2.01 BUILDING TYPE 1 1ST/2ND FLOOR - MECH/PLBG MP2.02 BUILDING TYPE 2 1ST/2ND FLOOR - MECH/PLBG MP2.03 BUILDING TYPE 3 1ST FLOOR - MECH/PLBG MP2.04 BUILDING TYPE 3 2ND FLOOR - MECH/PLBG MP2.05 BUILDING TYPE 4 1ST/2ND FLOOR - MECH/PLBG MP4.01 POOL EQUIPMENT/CABANA/TEAL FLOOR PLAN - MECH/PLBG M3.01 MECHANICAL UNIT M3.02 MECHANICAL UNIT
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 SECTION 00002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS
M3.03 MECHANICAL UNIT M5.01 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M5.02 MECHANICAL NOTES E0.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES E1.01 SITE PLAN - POWER E2.01 BUILDING TYPE 1 1ST/2ND FLOOR - ELECTRICAL E2.02 BUILDING TYPE 2 1ST/2ND FLOOR - ELECTRICAL E2.03 BUILDING TYPE 3 1ST FLOOR - ELECTRICAL E2.04 BUILDING TYPE 3 2ND FLOOR - ELECTRICAL E2.05 BUILDING TYPE 4 1ST/2ND FLOOR - ELECTRICAL E3.01 ELECTRICAL UNIT E3.02 ELECTRICAL UNIT E3.03 ELECTRICAL UNIT E4.01 POOL EQUIPMENT/CABANA/TEAL FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL E5.01 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEET E5.02 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEET E5.03 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEET E5.04 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEET E5.05 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEET P3.01 PLUMBING UNIT P3.02 PLUMBING UNIT P3.03 PLUMBING UNIT P5.01 PLUMBING SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEETS P5.02 PLUMBING SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEETS P5.03 PLUMBING SCHEDULE/DETAIL SHEETS
STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE
SL.1 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE NOTES SL.2 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE PLANS SL.3 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE PLANS SL.4 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE PLANS SL.5 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE PLANS SL.6 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE DETAILS SL.7 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE DETAILS SL.8 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE DETAILS SL.9 STRUCTURAL LANDSCAPE DETAILS
LANDSCAPE
L.1 LANDSCAPE NOTES L.2 LANDSCAPE PLANS L.3 LANDSCAPE PLANS L.4 LANDSCAPE PLANS L.5 LANDSCAPE PLAN DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS
END OF INDEX OF DRAWINGS
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00001 TITLE PAGE 00002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00500 AGREEMENT FORM 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01040 COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01615 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 CLEANING 01740 WARRANTIES
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00003-2
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02000 GENERAL CIVIL WORK 02051 GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02052 SITE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION & PREPARATION (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02230 CLEARING & GRUBBING (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02300 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02301 CONTRACTOR’S TRENCH EXCAVATION SYSTEM AND SHORING SAFETY PLAN (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02361 TERMITE CONTROL 02500 WATER AND SEWER UTILITIES-CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02512 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02538 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02750 SITE CONCRETE (Refer to civil drawings and Specifications) 02763 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS). 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03350 CONCRETE FINISHING - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03380 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03390 CONCRETE CURING - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 03521 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS).
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04100 MASONRY MORTAR 04150 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04700 MANUFACTURED MASONRY (ADHERED MASONRY) 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS) 06112 FRAMING AND SHEATHING - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06150 WOOD DECKING - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 06173 WOOD TRUSSES - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS). 06160 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSTEM) 06180 GLUE-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION - (REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS).
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00003-3
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06410 CABINETWORK 06600 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07120 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07219 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07460 CEMENT FIBER BOARD SIDING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07623 GUTTERS, LEADERS, AND DOWNSPOUTS 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07840 FIRESTOPPING 07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08115 METAL-CLAD DOORS 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08315 DRAFTSTOP & ATTIC ACCESS DOORS 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS 08360 RESIDENTIAL GARAGE DOORS 08560 VINYL WINDOW 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09310 TILE 09651 VINYL PLANK FLOORING 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10431 SIGNS AND AWNINGS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10550 MAILBOXES 10673 WIRE SHELVING 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11150 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11451 APPLIANCES
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00003-4
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NONE
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
REFER TO MEP SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00003-5
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR- CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 8127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0534 CONDUIT 26 0536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0537 BOXES 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2701 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2817 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL 28 1600 INTRUSION DETECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORM GENERAL
GOVERNING STANDARD DOCUMENTS
AIA Document A102 - 2007 (Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor – Cost of the Work Plus a Fee with Guaranteed Maximum Price), with Supplement.
END OF SECTION 00500
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 1 SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION", Document A-201, issued by the American Institute of Architects, 2007 Edition, relates to the Work of this Project and, as amended, is hereby made a part of this Contract.
No contractual adjustments shall be due or become exigent as a result of failure on the part of the Contractor to fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the contract with the conditions of Document A-201, as amended.
The edition of the American Institute of Architects, Document A-201, Referred to herein, is the Fifteenth Edition, dated 2007, Articles, 41 pages with amendments, hereinafter referred to as the "AIA General Conditions", or "General Conditions".
A copy of the "AIA General Conditions" referred to is on file at the office of the Architect and may be examined in that office, or purchased for $2.00, including postage and handling.
END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section shall not be interpreted to relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for supervision and coordination of all construction procedures, as provided herein and in the Contract Conditions.
B. Contractor Requirements:
1. Be responsible for supervising and directing the Work, using his best skill and attention. 2. Be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and coordination of all portions of Work under the Contract. 3. Be responsible for acts and omissions of his employees and Subcontractors and their agents. 4. The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligation to perform Work complying with the Contract Documents, either by activities of the Architect in his administration of the Contract, as described in Section 2.2 of the General Conditions, or by inspections, tests, or approvals required to substantiate Contract compliance. 5. Provisions of this Section are considered minimal for orderly and expeditious prosecution of the Work.
1.3 ORDERING PRODUCTS
A. Before ordering materials, equipment or custom or standard fabricated items, verify the following provisions:
1. Each item complies with Contract Documents. 2. Each properly relates to Work already completed. 3. Shop drawings or other submittals confirm compliance with Construction Documents. 4. Orders are placed and delivery dates are established allowing orderly execution of Work on schedule and not allowing untimely delivery of critically sensitive products before Project site conditions are satisfactory to receive them.
1.4 PRINTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Owner to supply Contractor with 2 sets of final construction documents and supply access to reproducible originals.
B. Owner to supply contractor with one drawing of all major changes.
C. Contractor to provide As Built drawings and specifications.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 COORDINATION 01040-2
1.5 COORDINATION AMONG TRADES
A. Initiate coordinating procedures at Project meetings before work in field begins. Resolve scheduling, sequencing, interferences and priorities of oncoming simultaneous Work among interested parties to achieve specified results and to advance planned progress of Project.
B. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the following coordination functions:
1. Power: Electrical Company shall bring electrical service to the site. Electrical subcontractor shall make all necessary connections to this work as indicated or required by drawings. 2. Water: Plumbing subcontractor shall make all necessary connections as indicated on drawings for each and all residential units, common areas, clubhouse, etc. 3. Sanitary Sewer: Plumbing subcontractor shall make all necessary connections as indicated on drawings. 4. Site Drainage: Contractor shall make all necessary storm water connections as indicated on drawings or as required to satisfy job field conditions. 5. Roadway Improvements: Contractor shall make all roadway improvements as indicated on drawings or as required to satisfy job field conditions. 6. Telephone: Phone Company shall bring telephone service into job site as indicated on drawings. Exact location of conduit stub out from exterior of building shall be verified with Telephone Company. Verify coordination with the owner. 7. Other Utilities: Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to provide all other utilities required as may be referred to on drawings or specifications. Verify coordination with the owner.
C. Continue coordinating procedures by actively controlling Project conditions as follows:
1. Verify products of all trades are stored in orderly fashion under conditions complying with manufacturer's instructions or specific requirements of relevant Specification section, whichever requirement is more stringent at planned locations. 2. Verify compliance with environmental conditions before, during, and after execution of work, with manufacturer's instructions and specific requirements of relevant sections of these Specifications. 3. Verify adherence to specified tolerances as work progresses.
D. Inspect job conditions before one trade follow another, in compliance with these requirements:
1. Plan joint inspections involving interested parties. 2. Portions of these inspections may be observed by the Architect. 3. Architect will confine his observations to only limited areas; Contractor shall be responsible for continuing similar inspections to all areas involved. 4. Review of job conditions, in part, or in whole, by Architect in no way relieves Contractor of his obligation to provide various stages of Work as well as finished Work complying with Contract Documents. 5. Allow no Work to proceed over unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent execution of new Work as specified.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 COORDINATION 01040-3
E. Continue coordinating efforts as Work progresses, verifying parties comply with decisions as agreed in this Specification section. Make adjustments in planned procedures as changing job conditions require achieving results specified to best advance progress of Work. Immediately advise all parties involved of required changes in construction schedule and planned procedure.
1.5 COORDINATION WITH RELATED WORK
A. Require all trades to cooperate with related work as well as with those sections enumerated in this Specification section. B. Contractor and His Subcontractors: coordinate work with separate contract work by Owner, if applicable, and with prior occupancy required by owner. Owner will provide timely notice of planned occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01040
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field- engineering services including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Land survey work. 2. Civil-engineering services. 3. Damage surveys. 4. Geotechnical monitoring.
B. The Work includes, but is not limited to verifying existing grades indicated on drawings, establishing and maintaining bench marks and reference lines, and lines, and laying out buildings and appurtenances.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 01040 - Coordination. 2. Section 01300 - Submittals. 3. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (not applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Identification: The Owner's surveyor will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes.
B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
D. Existing Grades: Verify existing grades prior to beginning site preparation. Notify Architect and Owner if existing grades are at variance with the Drawings. Await further instructions prior to proceeding.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050-2
E. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.
F. Site Preparation: Verify limits of site preparation and earthwork operations. Locate appurtenances, trees to remain, and existing pavements.
G. Building Locations: Verify locations and levels of buildings and appurtenances, including structural and facing components. Note variation from indicated locations and levels.
H. Verify batter boards at building corners.
I. Verify utility locations, including new construction and existing active and inactive encountered during construction activity.
J. Verify outside building lines to ensure correct position of buildings and appurtenances on Project site. Make required surveys to fix and verify foundation locations and elevations, column centerlines, walls, trenches, etc.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work.
D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
E. During course of Work, prepare log containing all data observed as result of field engineering. Maintain log for reference by Owner and Architect.
F. Notify Owner promptly in writing of on-site conditions at variance with Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 01050
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART I - GENERAL
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following Contractor's procedures:
1. Schedule and administer preconstruction meeting, weekly progress meetings with Subcontractors in attendance, and specially called meetings throughout progress of work. 2. Prepare agenda for meetings. 3. Distribute written notice of each meeting in advance of meeting date. 4. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 5. Preside at meetings. 6. Record minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 7. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five days after each meeting as follows:
a) One copy to each participant in meeting. b) One copy to parties affected by decisions made at meeting. c) One copy of minutes to Architect and Owner.
B. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
C. Architect and Owner may attend meetings to ascertain Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section “Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section “Submittals” for submitting the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section “Progress Schedules” for sequencing of regular meetings.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement, Construction Contract and related documents. Hold the conference at the Project- Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2
concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions, Proposal Requests, and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Parking availability. 11. Office, work, and storage areas. 12. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 13. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. 14. Temporary utilities. 15. Safety procedures. 16. First aid. 17. Security. 18. Housekeeping. 19. Working Hours
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule weekly meetings.
B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of Work.
C. Schedule Pay Application meetings once a month involving the Owner’s representative to review the previous month's Pay Application, the Progress Schedule, manpower requirements, etc.
D. Location of meetings: Project field office of Contractor.
E. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each Subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings.
F. Suggested agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work in progress since previous meetings. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Progress Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Progress Schedule. 8. Progress during succeeding work period.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-3
9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Pending changes. 13. Review proposed changes for effect on: a) Progress Schedule and on completion date. b) Other contracts of Project. 14. Review and approval of monthly Pay Applications. 15. Review safety report. 16. Other business.
G. Reporting: No later than 5 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
H. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Requirements in this section are mandatory procedures for preparing and submitting samples, shop drawing, and product data.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Product Data: Dated, printed literature of product manufacturer which describes product and installation procedures.
B. Samples: physical examples prepared to illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship; to establish standards by which Work will be judged as complying with Contract Documents.
C. Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and performance charts, prepared to illustrate a portion of Work in detail.
D. Submittals: general term include Samples, Shop Drawings, and Product Data, as applicable.
E. Substitutions: refer to Section 01600 Product Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other submittals, and other activities that require sequential operations.
B. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work.
C. Provide submittals in orderly sequence, timed to cause no delay in Work.
D. Job delays occasioned by requirement of resubmission of Samples, Shop Drawings, and Product Data not in accord with Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility and will not be considered valid justification for extension of time.
E. Beginning any portion of Work requiring Submittals to the Architect, until submittal has been reviewed by Architect, is prohibited.
F. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor.
G. Architect will not accept submittals that have not been reviewed and stamped by the Contractor.
H. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent label on each for identification. Provide a 4 by 5 inch space on the label beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include the following information on the label:
1. Project Name 2. Date
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 SUBMITTALS 01300-2
3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier. 5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 6. Contractor's certification that materials comply with specified requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit proposed submittals schedule to Owner and Architect for review within thirty calendar days following Contract execution. B. Schedule purpose is to: 1. Demonstrate that submittals, shop drawings, data, samples, and mock-ups required for Work are addressed by Contractor. 2. Demonstrate consistency with Contractor's proposed Progress Schedule. 3. Assist Owner in scheduling timely review/approval action of submittals. C. Schedule contents: description of submitted item, proposed date of submittal or availability for review, and proposed date of requested return. D. Within ten calendar days after Architect’s receipt of submittal schedule, Architect, Owner and Contractor shall jointly review schedule and mutually agree to acceptability or necessary modifications. E. Submit accepted schedule within ten calendar days after joint review date.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA PREPARATION
A. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following: 1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements. 2. Notation of coordination requirements. 3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Include product manufacturer's standard printed material, dated, with product description and installation instructions indicated; delete data not related to this Project or mark VOID, as applicable; the Architect will keep one or two copies for his records, return two copies to the Contractor, and forward one to the Owner's representative. C. Number of Copies Required: Six (Five to Architect and One to Owner’s Representative). Architect to return three copies to Contractor and one to Owner’s Representative.
1.6 SHOP DRAWING PREPARATION
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Indicate deviations from Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Submit 1 blue or black-line print on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Architect will return the reproducible print. Include the following:
1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale details, and other information, as appropriate for the work. 2. Identification of products and materials. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 5. Number sheets consecutively. 6. Indicate working and erection dimensions and relationships to adjacent work. Concurrent Submittals of different aspects of work may be required as deemed necessary
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 SUBMITTALS 01300-3
to demonstrate Contractor's ability to understand these relationships and coordinate work. 7. Provide 6' x 6' clean space in the lower right-hand area for entry of the approval stamps. 8. Cross-reference drawings details and Specification paragraphs applicable to the submitted data.
B. Number of Prints Required: Seven. (Five blue line or black line prints of Shop Drawings to Architect and three to Owner's representative.)
1.7 SAMPLE PREPARATION
A. Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Where variations are inherent in the material, submit at least 3 units that show limits of the variations. Include product name or name of the manufacturer.
1. Prepare samples in sizes, shapes, and finishes in accord with provisions of individual specification sections. 2. Number of samples submitted: two required by Contractor, plus one which will be retained by Architect, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Samples requiring color selection: submit at earliest practical time.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review submittals and stamp with approval action stamp containing Contractor's name, work 'APPROVED', signed initials of approving agent, date of approval action, review notes, comments, and corrections as required prior to submission. By so noting, Contractor indicates that he has reviewed and approves materials, equipment, quantities, and dimensions represented by particular submittal. B. Determine and verify field measurements, field construction, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. Check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. C. Where Work is indicated” BY OTHERS”, indicate responsibility for providing and coordinating such work. D. Contractor agrees Submittals processed are not change Orders; purpose of Submittals by Contractor is to demonstrate Contractor understands design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. E. Contractor represents by submitting Samples, Shop Drawings, and Product Data that he has complied with provisions specified above. Submissions made without Contractor's approval indicated thereon will be returned without being reviewed for compliance with this requirement. F. Date each Submittal; indicate name of Project, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, as applicable, description or name of equipment, material, or product and identify Work use location. G. Accompany Submittal with transmittal letter containing project name, Contractor's name, number of samples or drawings, titles, and other pertinent data. Outline deviations, if any, in Submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. H. Direct specific attention, in writing, on transmittal and resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples to revisions other than those requested by Architect or Owner on previous Submittals.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 SUBMITTALS 01300-4
1.9 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and return copies less those retained. B. Review Submittals with reasonable promptness to cause no delay in Work. Contractor shall allow 5 working days for Architect's review of all submittals. C. Review is only for conformance with design concept of project and information in Contract Documents. Review of separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which item functions. D. Review of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from requirements of Contract Documents unless Contractor has informed Owner in writing of such deviation at time of submission and Owner has given written approval to the specific deviation or in no way relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in Submittals. E. Owner to review and provide final approval on Submittals. A submittal is not considered approved unless the owner has approved it, or waived review.
1.10 CONTRACTORS RESUBMISSION
A. Make corrections and changes indicated for unapproved submissions; resubmit in same manner as specified above until approval is obtained. B. Direct specific attention to revisions other than corrections requested on previous submissions, if any, in resubmission transmittal.
1.11 DISTRIBUTION
A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing copies of Submittals to his Subcontractors and material suppliers. Contractor shall make prints of reviewed Shop Drawings from transparencies which carry appropriate stamp.
B. Contractor shall maintain orderly file of all approved Submittals bearing approval stamp for Project duration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Requirements: promptly after award of Contract, prepare and submit to Architect and Owner estimated construction progress schedules for Work, with Sub-schedules of related activities, which are essential to its progress. Refer to the requirements of the Contract Addendum.
B. Related sections: 1. Conditions of the Contract 2. Section 01300 - Submittals 3. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
1.3 SCHEDULE FORM
A. Prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart with dependencies. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal Time Scale: identify the first workday of each week. 3. Scale and Spacing: to allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of Listings: the chronological order of start of each item of Work.
C. Identification of Listings: by major specification section numbers.
1.4 SCHEDULE CONTENT
A. Progress Schedule: indicate the following: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Dates for beginning and completion of each major element of construction. 3. Major milestones.
B. Products Delivery Schedule: Indicate delivery dates for Products specified under Allowances.
C. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of prime schedules.
1.5 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01310-2
4. Other identifiable changes. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after award of Contract. Architect and Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten days after receipt. If required, resubmit within seven days after return of review copy.
B. Submit five opaque reproductions.
1.7 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to jobsite file, Subcontractors, and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01310
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports, performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
A. Owner shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and inspections specified in other Sections, and those required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.
C. Retesting: Contractor or applicable subcontractor shall pay for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary services as requested. Provide laboratory preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other materials mixes which require control by Testing Laboratory. Notify agency in advance of operations requiring tests or inspections, to permit assignment of personnel. Furnish copies of products test reports as required. Auxiliary services include the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests. 3. Adequate quantities of samples of materials that require testing, and assisting in taking samples. 4. Facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment.
1.3 DUTIES OF TESTING AGENCY
A. Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect, Owner and Contractor in performing its duties. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.
B. Agency shall perform necessary inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Agency shall notify Architect, Owner and Contractor of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
D. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
E. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor.
F. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report within three days of each inspection and test to the following:
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2
1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. 4. Structural engineer. 5. Record Documents File. 6. Authorities having jurisdiction, when authorities so direct.
G. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include at least the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names and signatures of individuals making the inspection or test. 6. Designation of the Work and test method. 7. Identification of product and specifications section. 8. Complete inspection or test data. 9. Test results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Compliance with Contract Documents. 11. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. 12. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with requirements. 13. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 14. Recommendations on retesting or re-inspection. 15. Agency shall perform additional tests as required by Architect or Owner.
1.4 LIMITATIONS OF TESTING AGENCY AUTHORITY
A. Agency shall not: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of Work. 3. Perform duties of Contractor. 4. Acceptance / rejection of concrete not responsibility of the testing agency.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS FOR SERVICE AGENCIES
A. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are pre-qualified as complying with the American Council of Independent Testing Laboratories, "Quality Assurance Manual”, and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. B. Each agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01400
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition" and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities.”
B. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70.
C. At the earliest possible time, change over from use of temporary utility services to use of permanent utilities.
D. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide new materials and equipment for construction of temporary facilities and controls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide temporary electric power, lighting, water, fire-protection, gas, telephone, service(s) to Project site for use during construction. Arrange for and coordinate service(s) with local utility companies.
B. Contractor shall also pay use charges for temporary utilities.
C. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of work, and for protection of new construction from adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is not permitted.
D. Provide temporary sanitary facilities. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, and maintenance of facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient prosecution of the Work.
B. Temporary field office shall be complete with lighting, heating and air conditioning, telephone service, a facsimile machine, a photocopier and computer with Internet service.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2
C. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and inclement weather and for containment of heat.
D. Collect waste daily and dispose of waste off-site according to local ordinances, when containers are full.
E. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.
3.3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Provide temporary fire protection until permanent systems supply fire-protection needs.
B. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers.
C. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations.
D. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
E. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
F. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction personnel from construction hazards.
G. Enclose construction area(s) with fence(s) with lockable entrance gates, to prevent unauthorized access.
H. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise control, and pollution control.
END OF SECTION 01500
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIRMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products of same kind from a single source.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Provide items that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation.
B. Provide products and equipment complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
C. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
D. Provide Products, Materials, Equipment, Etc. That comply with all Local, State and Federal Codes and Standards.
E. Select products as follows:
1. Where these Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the item indicated. 2. Where these Specifications name two or more products or manufacturers, provide one of the items indicated. 3. Where these Specifications describe a product and list characteristics required, with or without naming a brand or trademark, provide a product that complies with the characteristics and other requirements. 4. Where these Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for application. 5. Where these Specifications require compliance with codes, regulations, or reference standards, select a product that complies with the codes, regulations, or reference standards. 6. Deviations from this require Owner approval.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of any product from manufacturer’s full range of options.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
A. Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered. Substitutions include changes by the Contractor after award of the Contract, in products and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.
B. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings.
C. Submit 4 copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be replaced, provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed substitution with all specified requirements, and include the following: 1. A full comparison with the specified product. 2. A list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution. 3. Any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.
D. Architect / Owner will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical components and materials.
END OF SECTION 01600
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01615 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DELIVERY
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding construction spaces.
C. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for handling, storing, protecting, and installing. Labels shall indicate manufacturer and product name, description, mixing and application instructions, and fire-resistive classifications as applicable.
D. Inspect materials upon delivery to ensure proper material, color, type and quantity.
E. Deliver finish materials only after spaces are enclosed and adequate indoor storage facilities are available. Deliver items such as millwork only after spaces approximate completed environmental conditions.
1.3 STORAGE
A. Store materials and equipment under cover, at least 6” off ground and protected from excessive heat and freezing. Observe manufacturer's recommendations for positioning, separation, and ventilation, as applicable.
B. Prevent corrosion, soiling, breakage of materials, or contact with deleterious materials.
C. Store and handle products subject to spillage in areas where spills will not deface finished surfaces or other work.
D. Flammable or hazardous materials: 1. Store minimum quantities in protected areas. 2. Provide appropriate fire-extinguishers near storage areas. 3. Observe manufacturer’s precautions and applicable ordinances and regulations.
E. Comply with each manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for products storage handling.
F. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction.
G. Store items subject to damage aboveground, under cover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01615-2
1.4 HANDLING
A. Handle materials and equipment to prevent damage, deterioration, or contamination. Installation of materials which are physically damaged or stained prior to time of installation is prohibited.
1.5 INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Inspect to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure items are undamaged and properly protected.
B. Comply with manufacturer's product data in all aspects of basic material usage, handling, installation, and substrate preparation, except where more stringent requirements are specified
C. Be responsible for verifying and obtaining proper substrate conditions, tolerances, and material alignments to receive applied or attached materials and construction.
D. Provide substrates sound, clean, dry, and free of imperfections or conditions, which would be detrimental to reception of applied materials.
E. Align material to give smooth, uniform surface planes within specified tolerances and straight, plumb surfaces.
F. Inspect substrates prior to installation of applied material. Correct unacceptable conditions prior to proceeding with Work.
G. Provide finished surfaces clean, uniform, and free of damages, soiling, or defects in material and finish.
H. Finished Surfaces: Match color and texture of samples provided or approved by Architect.
I. Protection:
1. Protect finished surfaces from damage and soiling during application, drying, or curing, as applicable. 2. Provide temporary protective coverings or barriers as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01615
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CLOSEOUT TIMING
A. Prepare, assemble, and transmit the items listed herein to Architect upon receiving Certificate of Substantial Completion.
B. Submit items in duplicate, unless additional quantities are specified elsewhere.
C. Submit documents, tools, equipment; perform demonstrations and other closing requirements; obtain acceptance prior to Date of Final Acceptance.
1.3 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Submit two executed copies of Partial / Conditional Acceptance Form.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. (Color system: green / yellow).
B. Mark to show installation that varies from the Work originally shown. 1. Record mechanical and electrical Work covered by subsequent construction or requiring removal of finish material should maintenance be necessary. Number drawings consecutively; lay out to show locations of subject elements, with base lines or dimensions enabling exposure to elements with least disturbance to finish surfaces. Maintain a clean, up-to-date set of Record Drawings in the jobsite office for review by the Architect and Owner during each monthly Pay Application inspection visit. Field record drawings should include changes, clarifications, as-built information, etc.
2. Inspection Reports: Submit certificates from applicable local agencies indicating construction has been inspected as required by laws or ordinances and building is approved for occupancy.
3. Warranties: Contractor and each Subcontractor shall furnish his warranty in writing on form found in Project Manual in accord with Contract Conditions. a) Assemble, bind, label, and transmit warranties as required for other manual above. b) Indicate Date of Substantial Completion and date on which warranty expires.
4. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including Addenda, and Record Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
5. Provide Owner with three (3) sets of record drawings and warranties.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2
6. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into 3-ring binders, with 6 pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following in Digital (PDF) format:
a) Emergency instructions. b) Spare parts list. c) Copies of warranties. d) Shop Drawings and Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Leave extinguishers charged and ready for use with attached tag indicating date tested and by whom. All costs incurred shall be borne by Contractor. B. Keys: Deliver to Owner directly. Keys shall not be in possession of the Contractor. Tag each key to indicate lock which key operates. Accompany keys with final hardware schedule, as specified in Finish Hardware section.
3.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate demonstrations and trial runs of equipment for Owner's designated personnel; complete such demonstrations prior to Date of Final Acceptance. B. If a certain item within the project has had more than three (3) maintenance calls; these items are deemed defective and must be replaced. C. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:
1. Submit certified mylar Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and similar record information. Provide for complete set of record drawings to be scanned to PDF and furnished to Owner on DVD. 2. Deliver spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 3. Construction Key/Tenant Key will disable Construction Key. 4. Complete startup testing of systems and instructions of operation and maintenance personnel. 5. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 6. Complete final cleanup. 7. Touch up, repair, and restore marred, exposed finishes. 8. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Obtain final certificate of occupancy as required by authorities.
D. Upon receipt of a request for inspection, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. E. Request inspection for Certification of Final Acceptance and Final Payment, once the following are complete:
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3
1. Submit final payment request with releases of liens and supporting documentation. Include insurance certificates. 2. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion. 4. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
F. Architect will re-inspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.
G. On completion of re-inspection, Architect will prepare a Certificate of Final Acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, Architect will advise Contractor of the Work that is incomplete or obligations that have not yet been fulfilled.
H. Transfer all the utilities at the completion of all substantial completion checklist items to the Architects and Owners approval. At this time all keys shall be turned over to the Owner.
I. Provide a schedule that addresses the Phased delivery of the buildings.
END OF SECTION 01700
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor and Subcontractors: Keep project site free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish at all times during construction period. Remove all waste materials and rubbish from and about Project, as well as tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials, except those specifically required by Contract Documents to be left for Owner's maintenance at completion of Work. B. Upon failure to keep Project clean or to clean up prior to Date of Substantial Completion, Owner may do as provided in Paragraph 3.15 of the General Conditions; cost will be charged appropriately.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Store volatile and toxic waste in covered metal containers. Remove from Project site daily. Allow no volatile or toxic wastes to accumulate on Project site. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or toxic substances.
B. Burning or burying of waste materials or rubbish on Project site is prohibited.
C. Disposal of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains, on pavements, in gutters or downspouts, or on Project site is prohibited.
D. Disposal of waste or cleaning materials which contain materials harmful to plant growth on Project site is prohibited. Clean up materials which are accidentally spilled as quickly as possible.
E. Comply with OSHA requirements and maintain a Safety Plan onsite.
F. Designate a food consumption site.
3.2 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute cleaning procedures to ensure that buildings, Project site, and adjacent properties are maintained free from debris and rubbish.
B. Wet down materials subject to blowing. Throwing of waste materials from heights is prohibited.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 CLEANING 01710-2
C. Provide on-site containers for waste collection. Place all waste materials and rubbish in containers in an expeditious manner to prevent accumulation. Remove waste from Project site when containers become full.
D. Legally dispose of all waste materials, rubbish, volatile materials, and cleaning materials off Project site.
E. Clean and maintain interior spaces prior to start of finish painting in a “broom clean” state until date of Substantial Completion. Protect newly finished and clean surfaces from contamination during cleaning operations.
F. Accumulation of debris contributing to survival or spread of rodents, roaches, or other pests is prohibited. 1. Remove debris containing food scraps on a daily basis. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for securing services of a pest exterminator at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Disposal of materials in waterways is prohibited.
H. Graffiti or other similar distasteful comments or illustrations authored on any building materials used on Project are prohibited. Monitor Project for violations of this criteria, and, if found, take appropriate action immediately to cover or replace defaced materials as necessary.
3.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean all finished surfaces in accord with manufacturer’s product data and requirements specified in trade sections prior to Date of Substantial Completion. Perform all general and specific cleaning prior to request for Project or portion thereof to be inspected for Substantial Completion.
B. Remove dust, debris, oils, stains, fingerprints, and labels from exposed interior and exterior finish surfaces.
C. Replace, patch, ad touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Replace materials which cannot be repaired or patched.
D. Remove labels that are not permanent.
E. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds. Replace chipped or broken glass.
F. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and resilient flooring.
G. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
H. Clean disturbed areas of Project site of debris: 1. Remove debris from grassed and landscaped areas and disturbed areas.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 CLEANING 01710-3
I. Clean the site. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, even-textured surface.
J. Install one new A/C filter at each unit of Substantial Completion; clean ducts, blowers, and coils of HVAC equipment to fully remove construction type dust and debris from system components.
K. Wash and clean all vertical building surfaces after substantial completion of the final building acceptance.
L. Clean all walkways, roadways, trash from landscape, etc.
END OF SECTION 01710
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. C. Statement: No hazardous materials installed.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service of life.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3
WARRANTIES 01740-2
D. Owner’s Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect and Owner prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
C. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
D. Contractor Warranty: Form for Contractor Warranty. Prepare and execute the form. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. Submit the Approved Executed Form in Paper and Digital Format.
E. Subcontractor Warranty: Form for Subcontractor Warranty. Prepare and execute the form. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. Submit the Approved Executed Form in Paper and Digital Format
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 WARRANTIES 01740-3
END OF SECTION 01740
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 02000 GENERAL CIVIL WORK
Specifications for Civil and Site work shall be as per City of New Braunfels Standard Specifications:
"Items No." and "Standard Detail" referenced in these construction drawings are from the City of New Braunfels Standard Specifications and Details and shall be applicable to this work as required.
Methods of measurement and payment and pay items described in the City of New Braunfels Standard Specifications are not applicable to this project unless otherwise indicated in Division 1 of these documents.
Details can be obtained at:
City of New Braunfels Public Works Department
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMEMS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Submit Warranty.
C. Engage a licensed professional pest control operator to apply termite control solution.
D. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the U.S. EPA.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of Soil Treatment Warranty with provisions equivalent to the form included at the end of this Section, covering work of this Section, signed and countersigned by Subcontractor (Applicator) and Contractor. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. This warranty shall cover, but not be limited to, subterranean termite damage to the buildings and auxiliary structures.
C. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 General:
A. Trench and treat the perimeter using an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to prevent termite’s infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following products.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Termidor: Termiticide / Insecticide by BASF
C. Dilute to concentration level and solution recommended by manufacturer.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 TERMITE CONTROL 02361-2
D. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Subcontractor if approved for intended application by local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants.
2.2 Optional Treatment:
A. Perimeter termite barrier consisting of the following product.
B. Product: Termimesh Termite Barrier;
1. Install to perimeter of foundations and service penetrations and as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Use all types of protection as required by the manufacturer to meet the warranty limits. 3. Installation must be undertaken by an Accredited and Licensed Installer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare surfaces and apply treatment at rates and concentrations recommended in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply termite control to the following:
1. Apply the trench and treat chemical based termiticide to the perimeter of the existing concrete foundation in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Apply perimeter termite barrier to the perimeter of the existing concrete foundation and as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Post signs in areas of application warning workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.
D. Reapply soil termiticide treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application.
E. Optional Treatment:
1. Apply perimeter termite barrier to the perimeter of the existing concrete foundation and as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 02361
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 02763 PAVEMENT MARKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish material and apply pavement and curb markings as described in Contract Documents.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements - Paint handicap spaces to conform to ADA Standards and all Local codes, Building & Fire Code requirements.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Environmental Requirements 1. Apply only on dry surfaces, during favorable weather, and when damage by rain, fog, or condensation not anticipated. 2. Latex Paint - a. Atmospheric temperature above 50 deg F. b. When temperature is not anticipated to drop below 50 deg F during drying period. 3. Alkyd or Chlorinated Rubber Paint - a. Atmospheric temperature above 40 deg F. b. When temperature is not anticipated to drop below 40 deg F during drying period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Paint 1. Non-reflectorized. 2. Types - a. Acrylic Latex for uncured paving b. Alkyd or chlorinated rubber for cured paving 3. Colors - a. White - Parking stripes, crosswalk stripes, and safety markings on asphalt pavement. b. Blue And White - Handicapped markings. c. Red - Fire lanes and no parking zones. 4. Acceptable Products And Manufacturers - a. 442XX Traffic Marking Paint by ICI Devoe, Cleveland, OH (888) 681-6353 www.devoepaint.com b. Set-Fast Traffic Marking Paint by Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH (800) 321- 8194 www.sherwin-williams.com c. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01600.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 PAVEMENT MARKING 02763-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not apply acrylic latex systems until paving has cured 7 days minimum. Do not apply alkyd or chlorinated rubber until paving has cured 3 months minimum.
B. Surfaces shall be dry and free of grease and loose dirt particles. Scrape and wire brush chipped or damaged paint on existing curbs.
C. Perform layout with chalk or lumber crayon only.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Site Tolerances 1. General - Make lines parallel, evenly spaced, and with sharply defined edges. 2. Line Widths - a. Plus or minus 1/4 variance on straight segments. b. Plus or minus 1/2 variance on curved segments.
B. Provide two coat applications, each coat with coverage of 150 sq ft per gal. Do not apply second coat within three hours minimum or until first coat is thoroughly dried, whichever is longer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic by sand blasting, wire brushing, or other method approved by Architect prior to performance.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 04100 MASONRY MORTAR PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit material certificates for each different masonry product required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Mortar Type: Conform to ASTM C-270, Type “N” proportion specification.
B. Mortar Color: AHI Supply, Spectrum Colored Cements. Color as selected by owner / architect. Provide sample panel for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING:
A. Measurement of Materials: The method of measuring materials for masonry mortar or grout in masonry construction shall be by either volume or weight, and such that the specified proportions of masonry mortar or grout materials can be controlled and accurately maintained.
B. Measurement of sand by shovel shall not be permitted.
C. Mixing of Mortar Materials: All cementitious materials and aggregate shall be mixed for at least 3 minutes and not more than 5 minutes in a mechanized batch mixer, with maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency.
D. Mixing of Grout Materials: All cementitious materials and aggregate shall be mixed for at least 3 minutes and not more than 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer, with maximum amount of water to produce specified slump.
E. Retempering of Mortar: Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from masonry mortar shall be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency. Mortars shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours of after initial mixing.
F. Placement of Mortar: Following requirements for Laying –Up Masonry Construction as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.
G. Pointing and Cleaning: Following requirements for Laying –Up Masonry Construction as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 MASONRY MORTAR 04100-2
H. Protection: Following requirements for Laying –Up Masonry Construction as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.
END OF SECTION 04100
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 04150 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit to Architect all required submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 Submittals and Shop Drawings.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of product data on all pre-manufactured masonry accessories specified herein.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings o for masonry reinforcing steel for approval; do not fabricate or deliver masonry reinforcing steel until shop drawings are approved unless such approval is waived in writing by the Architect.
D. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Deliver and store Masonry Accessories in accordance with Unit Masonry Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL TIES:
A. Stone & Brick Veneer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Model # DW-10HS Adjustable Veneer Anchor, 14 gauge, hot dip galvanized. Hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M B2 finish. Wire portion to be Vee Byna-Tie® (#VBT) 3/16” diameter x 4” long (increase length as required by masonry selection).
B. Brick Veneer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Model #345-BT Veneer Anchor, 12 gauge, hot dip galvanized with Vee Byna-Tie® (#VBT) 3/16” diameter x 4” long (increase length as required by masonry selection). Hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M B2 finish.
Wall ties shall be spaced so as to support not more than 2 square feet of wall area but shall not be more than 16 inches on center horizontally and vertical.
Wall ties shall extend into the veneer a minimum of 1-1/2 inches, with at least 5/8 inch mortar coverage to the outside face.
2.2 Mortar dropping collection device:
A. Mortar dropping collection device for masonry cavity walls:
1. Manufacturer: Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 2. Contact: 541 S. Lake Street, Gary, IN 46403; Tel.: (800) 664-6638, (219) 939-3870; Fax: (219) 939-3877, E-mail: [email protected], Website: www.mortarnet.com
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04150-2
a. Mortar Net MN 10-2: 10” (254 mm) high x 2” (51 mm) thick material. b. Mortar Net MN 10-1: 10” (254 mm) high x 1” (25.4 mm) thick material. c. Mortar Net MN 10-4: 10” (254 mm) high x 0.4” (10.2 mm) thick material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0 PREPARATION:
A. Wall Ties – Veneer: One for each 2 square feet of wall area. Ties must extend at least half the thickness of the masonry wall (no less than 1-1/2 inch) and no closer than 5/8” to the face of the veneer.
B. Mortar dropping collection device:
1. Preparation, examination, inspection and installation as recommended by manufacturer. Match product size to cavity size. Cavity should be no more than 1/4” (6.4 mm) wider than 1” (25.4 mm) thick material and 2” (51 mm) thick material, and 0.4” (10.2 mm) thick material should touch both the outer wythe and the inner wall. For cavities larger than 2” (51 mm), place rigid insulation of sufficient height to extend at least 6” (152 mm) above the top of the Mortar Net against the outside of the inner wythe and of appropriate thickness to reduce the cavity to the appropriate size.
2. Inspect for and repair holes in flashing immediately prior to installing Mortar Net.
END OF SECTION 04150
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 04700 MANUFACTURED MASONRY (ADHERED MASONRY)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer, Manufactured stone trim, and application materials.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section specifying flashing materials and weather resistant barrier. 2. Division 09 Section specifying Portland cement plastering. 3. Division 10 Section specifying fireplaces and stoves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 5. ASTM C 270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C 482, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
C. Building Materials Evaluation Commission.
D. International Code Council (ICC): 1. ES Report. 2. UBC Standard No. 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper.
E. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society.
F. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation.
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. Listing in Material Approval Guide. 2. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H. US Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD): Material Release Number.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 01300−Submittal Procedures; submit following items: 1. Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and weather resistant barrier.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 MANUFACTURED MASONRY 04700-2
2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of installer qualifications. b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report. c. Test Reports for physical properties. d. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.
B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01700−Closeout Submittals; submit following items: 1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Minimum five years experience in producing manufactured masonry. b. Member of following organizations: 1) MSJC. 2) ACI. 3) ASTM. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project.
B. Certifications: 1. Current ICC-ES Report. 2. UL: Listing in Material Approval Guide. 3. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. 4. HUD: Material Release Number. 5. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation.
C. Field Samples: Provide in a location selected by Architect showing representative sample of installed product including penetration and termination details, corner detail and mortar color and tooling. 1. Reference Section 01400 − Quality Control. 2. Minimum Size: 4 by 4 feet. 3. Approved field samples may remain as part of completed Work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Reference Section 01600−Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 MANUFACTURED MASONRY 04700-3
1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of Final Acceptance.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Cobra Stone Inc.
Florence, TX 76527 Phone: 512-746-5600 Website: http://www.cobrastone.com/index.php
Substitutions: Section 01600.
2.02 MANUFACTURED MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Cut Stone: 1. Chopped Autumn Blend (4, 6, 8) sawn to 2-1/2” thick veneer for adhered application (Blend as selected by owner).
B. Architectural Trim: provide Wall Capstones, Hearthstones, Trim Stones, Lintels, Watersills, Light Fixture Stones and Keystones as required and detailed.
C. Cut Stone: 1. Maximum Veneer Unit Weight: 15 psf (73 kg/m2).
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Weather Resistant Barrier: No. 15, Type I, asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226 (Two layers). Provide an extra layer of 18” waterproof membrane at inside and outside corners.
B. Metal Lath: 2.5 lb (1.4 kg/m2) galvanized expanded metal lath.
C. Fasteners: 1. Into Wood Studs: Minimum 0.120 inch (3 mm) shank diameter galvanized nails or staples of sufficient length to penetrate 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) minimum into the stud.
D. Mortar: Premixed Type N or mortar mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 MANUFACTURED MASONRY 04700-4
1. Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments.
E. Provide Sturdi Mount Fiber Cement Mounting Blocks at ALL wall mounted light fixtures. Size as required for the fixture selected (www.sturdibuild.com). Coordinate and detail for adhered masonry and stucco conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed.
B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured masonry is applied during and for 48 hours following installation of the manufactured masonry.
B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate type of manufactured masonry and substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install Cobra Stone Inc. products in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions using grouted joints as selected and approved by the architect and owner.
B. Install/Apply Related Materials specified above in accordance with type of substrate and manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide two (2) periodic site visits, each of approximately one (1) hour duration.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Reference Section 01710−Cleaning and Waste Management.
B. Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation.
B. Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit material certificates for each different masonry product required.
B. Submit Shop Drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
C. Submit samples of each exposed masonry unit.
D. Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
E. Provide unit masonry that develops the installed compressive strengths (fm) indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification, Normal Weight; Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units.
B. Special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, and other special conditions. 1. Square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Size: 8-Inch (200-mm) Utility: 7-5/8 inches thick by 7-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
C. Special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
2.3 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
A. Unspecified Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in masonry grout or masonry mortar, particularly air entraining agents (including air-entrained lime or portland cement) or masonry cement materials.
B. Masonry Cement for Grout: ASTM C 91, Type S.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than ¼” use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing through a No. 16 sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Refractory Mortar: ASTM C 199.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for job-mixed mortar; and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar of types indicated.
B. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, reinforced masonry, and where indicated, use Type S.
C. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D. Refractory Mortar: HeatStop 50 Premix.
2.3 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS
A. Provide joint reinforcement formed from galvanized carbon-steel wire, ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for both interior and exterior walls.
B. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm).
C. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm).
D. For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder design.
E. For multiwythe masonry, provide tab design with single pair of side rods.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
G. Bent Wire Ties: Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated.
H. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated.
I. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars of form, thickness, and length indicated.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3
2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Sheet metal Flashing: 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Unit-Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter. Length and configuration indicated.
D. Wall Ties: Refer to Section 04150 Masonry Accessories.
C. Masonry Cleaner: 1/2-cup (0.14-L) tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in the Project.
B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
C. Lay out piers and walls in advance for accurate spacing. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners and, where possible, at other locations.
D. Lay up piers and walls to comply with specified construction tolerances with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction.
E. Install joint reinforcing at 16” O.C. vertically.
F. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back units; do not tooth.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
I. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build in items as required. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
J. Remove and replace loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged masonry units.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4
3.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
A. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, do not enlarge any voids or holes.
C. Mixing Mortar: All cementitious materials and aggregates shall be mixed for a minimum of three minutes with the amount of water required to produce the desired workability.
D. Re-temper mortar only by adding water within a basin formed of mortar and the mortar reworked into the water. Mortar which has become harsh and non-plastic shall not be re- tempered or used.
3.2 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Build masonry lintels where shown.
C. Minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (460 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
B. Mortar Properties: ASTM C 270.
C. Mortar Composition and Properties: ASTM C 780.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1019.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, remove large mortar particles and scrub exposed unit masonry.
B. Wet wall surfaces with water, apply cleaner, and then remove cleaner by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
END OF SECTION 04810
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Shop Drawings showing details of fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
B. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786 (ASTM A 786M).
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), black finish.
D. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
F. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632 (ASTM B 632M) Pattern 1, alloy 6061- T6.
2.2 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate miscellaneous metal fabrications form structural shapes and bars fully welded together. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints.
B. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. Cap bollards with ¼ inch (6.4-mm) minimum dome cap steel plate with trim band or as detailed.
2.4 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Hot-dip galvanized steel fabrications at all assemblies labeled “galvanized” on construction documents.
B. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," and paint with a rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT- P-664.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
C. Anchor bollards in concrete and fill solidly with concrete.
END OF SECTION 05500
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-applied finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40.
C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 501.
D. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200).
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.2 STANDARD RAILING SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Wagner Braun Railings 2. Petersen Metal Products, Inc. 3. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 4. Summit Steel 5. Alan Steel Corp. 6. Aber Fence & Supply Co.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Assemble railing systems in shop to the greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Form changes in direction of railing members by use of prefabricated fittings.
C. Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS 05520-2
D. Manufacturer's standard wall brackets, newel posts, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction. Provide Wagner Braun Railing brackets as required for handrails to meet all applicable state, local and national codes currently enforced.
E. Refer to section 01600 for substitution of manufacturer approval.
F. Wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
G. Return all handrail ends to posts or provide a 12” loop return.
H. Provide posts at 48” O.C. maximum spacing.
I. Manufacture and install handrails and guardrails to resist the loads as required by all applicable state, local and national codes currently enforced.
J. Guardrail pickets shall be spaced such that a 4” sphere cannot pass thru.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Clean and shop prime steel railings for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation and free from rack.
C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) greater than OD of post. Fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout (level with top of concrete to avoid ponding water). Post spacing maximum 48” O.C.
E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets (48” O.C. maximum spacing).
F. Load capacity of all handrails to meet all applicable state, local and national codes currently enforced.
END OF SECTION 05520
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes roof curbs, cants, and perimeter nailers; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, handrails and miscellaneous items of finish; telephone and electrical panel back boards and preservative treatment of wood.
B. All first floor apartment units & accessory buildings toilet rooms: Provide concealed wood blocking for support of all grab bars, shower seats, etc. as required by the Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines.
C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04210: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. 2. Section 06100 & 06150: Wood roof decking to receive wood curbs. 3. Window & Door openings to receive wood blocking.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.
B. American Wood-Preservers’ Association: 1. AWPA C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. 2. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
C. National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
D. The Redwood Inspection Service: 1. RIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
E. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: 1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.
F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
G. Western Wood Products Association: 1. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit technical data on wood preservative and fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by NIST PS 20. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: AP&PA, RIS, SPIB, WCLIB, WWPA G-5.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, species: mixed southern pine, Douglas fir – larch, grade 19 percent maximum moisture content after treatment, pressure preservative treat.
C. Plywood: refer to structural drawings.
D. Particleboard: refer to structural drawings.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): colored, C type, manufacturer shall be registered by the EPA.
C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Pressure treatment, AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood, Interior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25/450.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive blocking, curbing and framing.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114-3
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of blocking, curbing and framing items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
B. Place horizontal members, crown side up.
C. Construct curb members of solid wood sections.
D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, parapet construction, and roofing.
F. Space framing, refer to structural drawings.
G. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered.
H. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with exterior plywood sheathing material where required. Apply smooth hardipanel over entire plywood sheathing. Provide sealant and backer rod around all penetrations. Size back boards 12 inches beyond size of electrical and telephone panel.
3.4 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment.
B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Roof Blocking: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatment.
B. Interior blocking: Stud grade.
C. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: 3/4 inch thick, square edges, site brush applied preservative treated.
D. Provide solid wood blocking for all wall, ceiling and floor mounted products. Refer to the Fair Housing Act for additional requirements.
END OF SECTION 6114
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 06160 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSTEM)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Combination wall sheathing, water resistive barrier and air barrier. 2. Self-adhering flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry".
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. For panels with integral water resistive barrier, include data on air/-moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referencing standards.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Capable of demonstrating that all wood procurement operations are conducted in accordance with procedures and policies of the Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) Program.
B. Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of the following:
1. International Code Council (ICC), ICC-ESR1474 (ZIP System Wall Sheathing). 2. International Code Council (ICC), ICC-ESR2227 (ZIP System Tape).
C. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized sheathing installation.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSEM) 06160-2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Outdoor Storage: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Set panel bundles on supports to keep off ground. 2. Cover panels loosely with waterproof protective material. 3. Anchor covers on top of stack, but keep away from sides and bottom to assure adequate air circulation. 4. When high moisture conditions exist, cut banding on panel stack to prevent edge damage.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sheathing system that fail due to manufacturing defects within specified warranty period.
1. System Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's Fire Resistance Directory and GA-600, Fire Resistance Design Manual.
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2-10.
B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. Thickness shall satisfy minimum and maximum requirements for referenced performance category.
C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 COMBINATION WALL SHEATHING, WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER, AND AIR BARRIER
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: With integral water-resistive barrier, Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Huber Engineered Woods LLC; ZIP System Wall Sheathing.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSEM) 06160-3
Comparable product must be approved by the design structural engineer, architect and owner. 2. Span Rating and Performance Category: Not less than 32/16; 1/2 Performance Category (coordinate with structural drawings). 3. Edge Profile: Square edge. 4. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with pre-spaced fastening symbols for 16- inches (406 mm) and 24-inches (610 mm) on centers spacings. 5. Performance Standard: DOC PS2-10 and ICC-ES ESR-1474. 6. Factory laminated integral water-resistive barrier facer. 7. Perm Rating of Integral Water-Resistive Barrier: 12-16 perms. 8. Assembly maximum air leakage of 0.0072 cfm/sq. ft. (0.037 L/s x sq. m) infiltration and 0.0023 cfm/ sq. ft. (0.012 L/s x sq. m)exfiltration at a pressure differential of 1.57 (psf 75 Pa). 9. Exposure Time: Designed to resist weather exposure for 180 days.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type that comply with requirements specified in this article by the authority having jurisdiction, International Building Code, International Residential Code, Wood Frame Construction manual, and National Design Specification.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-applied, proprietary seam tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System Seam and Flashing Tape. 2. Thickness: 0.012 inch (0.3 mm). 3. Width: 3.75 inch (95.3 mm) at panel seams. 6 inch (152.4 mm) at windows and doors flashing and at inside and outside corners. 4. Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. "AC148 - Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials." 5. International Code Council (ICC), ICC-ES ESR2227 (ZIP System Tape).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSEM) 06160-4
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Chapter 23 in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
G. Only mechanically attached and drainable EIFS and exterior insulation should be used with ZIP System wall sheathing.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. d. Install fasteners 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) from panel edges. e. Space fasteners in compliance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
3.3 SHEATHING JOINT TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply ZIP System proprietary seam tape to joints between sheathing panels. 2. Utilize ZIP System tape gun or hard rubber roller provided by manufacturer to ensure tape is completely adhered to substrates.
3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply ZIP System Tape flexible flashing where indicated and at all windows & doors and at all penetrations to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 2. Width for Flexible Flashing: 6 inch (154.4 mm). 3. Install sample window and door for Architects and Owners review and approval. Certify that all waterproofing is installed according to the manufacturers published instructions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 SHEATHING (HEW ZIP SYSEM) 06160-5
4. Other Openings and Penetrations: Provide flashings for other openings as required to provide weathertight barrier. Install lapped components and water dams to direct water to exterior of building.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Apply ZIP System sheathing to all exterior walls.
END OF SECTION 061600
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, fasteners, and equipment necessary and proper to complete the finish carpentry labor work shown on the drawings and specified herein or reasonably implied by same.
B. Protect adjacent installed or stored materials from damage. Any damaged material will be repaired or replaced at expense of this subcontractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.”
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized installation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed and wet-work is completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.
D. Dressed lumber, 8 to 13 percent maximum moisture content (damp region).
E. Plywood, 18 percent maximum moisture content.
F. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Product made without formaldehyde and complying with ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2
G. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
H. All products shall be urea-formaldehyde free.
2.2 PAVILION, POOL EQUIPMENT BUILDING & TRELLISES
A. Species: Premium Grade, made from #1 fir, rough sawn with square edges.
2.3 DECORATIVE ROOF OVERHANG BRACKETS, TRUSSES & BEAMS
B. Rex Linn, Lumber Link Inc. (210) 520-2262, http://www.limberlinkinc.com C. Species: Premium Grade, made from #1 fir, S4S with square edges.
2.4 WOOD COLUMNS AND EXTERIOR TRIM
A. RealWood by Woodtone – RealPost and RealTrim, Western Canadian SPF, Factory primed.
2.5 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Interior Trim – Units & Garages:
1. Species: Eastern white pine; NELMA lumber grades or Idaho white, lodgepole pine, ponderosa, sugar pine (WWPA). 2. Grade: Prime Finish. 3. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock. 4. Profiles: a) Base Molding: 1 x 4 Pine b) Door, Cased Opening, Cabinet Trim: 1 x 4 Pine with inner chamfer as detailed. c) Window Stool: 4-1/2” Wood with 1 x 4 Wood skirt.
B. Interior Trim – Pavilion & Pool Equipment Buildings (Where Scheduled and as shown on interior elevations)
1. Grade: Paint Grade Finish. 2. Lumber for Finish: pine solid lumber stock. 3. Profiles: a) Base Molding: Milled 1 x 6 pine with top bevel as detailed. b) Door and Window Trim: Milled ¾” x 4” pine as detailed. c) Window Stool & Trim: 1 x 4 Wood with 1 x 3 pine skirt.
C. Exterior Fascias – All Buildings refer to details. 1. Cement fiberboard trim.
D. Exterior door trim: All Buildings refer to details. 1. RealTrim by Woodtone - Factory Primed Trim
E. Exterior window trim: All Buildings refer to details.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3
1. 5/4 Cement Fiberboard Trim.
F. Pool Equipment Building: 1. All trim, 5/4 x 4 cement fiberboard.
2.6 SHELVING
A. Shelving: 12 inch wire shelving with powder-coat finish.
2.7 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Soffits: Cement fiberboard panels (vented and unvented) with cement fiberboard trim.
B. Porch & Patio Soffits: Cement fiberboard panels with cement fiberboard trim.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. Provide all nails, staples, bolts, screws, molly bolts, wall anchors, and other connectors needed for work under this section.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood trim and jambs to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished Work. Finger-joint material is acceptable where it is to be painted.
B. Construct all cabinets with low VOC adhesives.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Condition finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing.
B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior.
C. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts.
D. Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping, and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
F. Except where Prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailings, set flush with woodwork.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4
G. Use molly bolts or wall anchors to attach material to hollow walls.
H. Securely attach gypsum board and cement fiber board soffit panels to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated and as required by recognized standards, complying with the following: 1. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails in cement fiber board panels.
2. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel screws in gypsum soffit panels.
3. Set nail and screw heads in soffit panels and fill holes.
4. Tape and float gypsum board soffits for priming and painting. Waterproof tape & float for exterior soffits.
I. Install wire shelving full width of wall and supported according to manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 06200
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01300 Submittals.
B. Submit product data for hardware, plastic laminates, plywood, or other materials used in the fabrication of cabinetwork.
C. Submit Shop Drawings for cabinetwork showing location of each item, including dimensioned plans and elevations, large details, anchors, and other components as necessary.
D. Submit shop drawings of removable base cabinets detailing the counter and support brackets, removable base unit and hardware to remove and replace the cabinet.
E. Submit Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish. Submit Samples of countertop construction, drawer slides, cabinet construction, and door construction.
F. Submit shop drawings of removable base cabinets detailing the counter and support brackets, removable base unit and hardware to remove and replace the cabinet.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized installation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinetwork until building is enclosed and wet-work is completed.
B. Field Measurements: where cabinetwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing cabinetwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 CABINETWORK 06410-2
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Cabinet Doors: Furnish 4 of each size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. No Tropical Hardwoods. B. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. D. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. F. Construct cabinets with low VOC adhesives. G. Cabinet construction to comply with ANSI A 161.2.
2.2 CABINETWORK APARTMENT UNITS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Authentic Custom Cabinets 2. Leedo 3. Master Woodcraft 4. Cardell Cabinetry 5. Kitchen Cabinets Incorporated
B. Cabinet door style: Shaker profile.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. 1. Cabinet drawers Slides: Gross Load 200 lbs., 50,000 Cycles, all Ball Bearing. 2. Door hinges shall be fully concealed self closing euro type hinges selected and approved by the Owner.
B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
C. Finish: 1. Units: Stain grade – Beechwood – color - (Grey Nuvoloso). 2. All finishes shall have low VOC content.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 CABINETWORK 06410-3
D. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content.
2.4 CABINETWORK AT UNITS
A. Complete fabrication before shipping to Project site to maximum extent as possible. Disassemble only as needed for shipping and installing. Where necessary for fitting at Project site, provide for scribing and trimming.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Full overlay.
C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Stain Grade, Hardwood, species and finish selected by Owner from manufacturer stock designs.
D. All cabinet fronts and doors shall be solid stock stain grade hardwood ¾” thick by 1-1/2” solid hardwood. Door stile and rails are 2” wide solid. Door plywood inserts to be ¼” thick with Beechwood veneer both sides. All doors finished with a catalyzed acrylic finish.
E. All cabinet sides, tops, bottoms and shelves shall be constructed with ½” plywood with UV cured polyurethane finish on both sides. Sides and bottom are dado into face frame. All surfaces to be sanded and finished.
F. All sink and lavatory cabinet sides, tops, bottoms and shelves shall be constructed with ½” min. plywood with UV cured polyurethane finish on both sides. Sides and bottoms are dado into face frame. All surfaces to be sanded and finished.
G. Drawer construction to be ½” plywood with edge banding on all visible surfaces. ¼” plywood bottom dado construction. All surfaces to be finished with a UV cured polyurethane.
H. Shelving to be constructed of ¾” plywood with matching edge band and melamine paper. All surfaces to be finished with a UV cured polyurethane. Shelves in cabinets to be fully adjustable.
I. Molding to be hardwood with matching finish.
J. Provide 2-1/2” crown mold trim to match cabinet fronts at all upper wall cabinets.
K. Medicine Cabinet – wood door to match vanity cabinets. Provide 16” x 20” cabinet with 2 adjustable shelves. Provide one cabinet where shown on plans at units.
L. Units: Cabinet Drawers: Knobs4Less, Inc. (866-482-0833), Liberty Hardware, 3” Steel Bar Pull, Brush Nickel, Part # LIB-120365, 5.4” pull.
M. Units: Cabinet Doors: Knobs4Less, Inc. (866-482-0833), Liberty Hardware, 3” Steel Bar Pull, Brush Nickel, Part # LIB-120365, 5.4” pull.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS
A. Provide a minimum of 8 color options of the granite colors.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 CABINETWORK 06410-4
B. Unit cabinet countertops shall be Granite with Polished Square Edge. (3 cm @ Kitchen, 2 cm @ Baths)
C. Cut openings for equipment to be installed in countertops. Comply with equipment manufacturer’s requirements. Smooth saw cut and ease edges. All sinks and lavatories to be undermount at Granite Countertops (coordinate with plumbing schedule).
2.7 COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASH
A. Cut openings for equipment to be installed in countertops. Comply with equipment manufacturer’s requirements. Smooth cut and ease edges.
1. Kitchen Countertop 3cm granite. Lavatory Countertop 2cm granite and 2cm granite splashes. All sink and lavatory counter tops to be supported by cabinet box surrounding cut out. 2. Seal granite with DuPont™ Granite & Marble Countertop Sealer.
B. Price for 3 standard colors by : Lewisville Granite
C. Backsplash: refer to plans for List Of Finishes.
D. Substitutions: Refer to section 01600 Product Requirements
2.8 SHOP FINISHING OF CABINETWORK
A. Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.
B. Finish architectural cabinetwork at the fabrication shop.
C. Transparent Finish: Manufacturer's standard finishes complying with AWI finish standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Condition cabinetwork to prevailing conditions before installing.
B. Install cabinetwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified.
C. Install cabinetwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for level and plumb.
D. Scribe and cut cabinetwork to fit adjoining work, seal cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor countertops securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall.
E. Adjust cabinetwork and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 CABINETWORK 06410-5
F. Provide removable base cabinet at accessible kitchen sink and bath lavatory. Accessible cabinet shall be equipped with a removable apron to shield plumbing. The side panels of the flanking cabinets shall be finished.
G. Provide upper and lower closed blind corners and fillers to seal off any openings.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure cabinetwork is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06410
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 06600 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cellular pvc trim boards for corner boards, soffits, fascias, battens, door pilasters, frieze boards, rake boards, architectural millwork and door/window trim.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 64 00 - Plastic Paneling. B. Section 06 65 00 - Plastic Simulated Wood Trim. C. Section 06 66 00 - Custom Ornamental Simulated Woodwork.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D792 - Density and Specific Gravity of Plastics by Displacement. B. ASTM D570 - Water Absorption of Plastics. C. ASTM D638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. E. ASTM D1761 - Mechanical Fasteners in Wood. F. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight. G. ASTM D256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. H. ASTM D696 - Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous silica Dilatometer. I. ASTM D635 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. J. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. K. ASTM D648 - Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. L. ASTM D3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit product data, manufacturer's catalogs, SPEC-DATA® product sheet, for specified products. C. Samples: Submit three material samples representative of the texture, thickness and widths shown and specified herein.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Regulatory Requirements: Check with Local Building Code for installation requirements.
2. Allowable Tolerances: a. Variation in component length: -0.00 / +1.00” b. Variation in component width: ± 1/16” c. Variation in component thickness: ± 1/16” d. Variation in component edge cut: ± 2° e. Variation in Density -0% + 10%
3. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance: a. Free foam cellular pvc that is homogeneous and free of voids, holes, cracks, and foreign inclusions and other defects. Edges must be square, and top and bottom surfaces shall be flat with no convex or concave deviation. b. Uniform surface free from cupping, warping, and twisting. c. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized installation.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Trim materials should be stored on a flat and level surface on a full shipping pallet. Handle materials to prevent damage to product edges and corners. Store materials under a protective covering to prevent jobsite dirt and residue from collecting on the boards.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against defects in manufacturing that cause the products to rot, corrode, delaminate, or excessively swell from moisture.
PART II PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable products: AZEK® Trimboards manufactured by Vycom Corporation, 801 Corey Street, Moosic, PA 18507. (Acceptable substitution: Royal Building Products)
B. Material: Free foam cellular pvc material with a small-cell microstructure and density of .55 grams/cm3. 1. Material shall have a minimum physical and performance properties specified in Section C on the following page. C. Performance and physical characteristic requirements:
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-3
PROPERTY UNITS VALUE ASTM Method
PHYSICAL
Density g/cm3 0.55 D 792 Water Absorption % 0.15 D 570 MECHANICAL Tensile Strength psi 2256 D 638 Tensile Modulus psi 144,000 D 638 Flexural Strength psi 3329 D 790 Flexural Modulus psi 144,219 D 790 Nail Hold Lbf/in of penetration 35 D 1761 Screw Hold Lbf/in of penetration 680 D 1761 Staple Hold Lbf/in of penetration 180 D 1761 Gardner Impact in-lbs 103 D 5420 Charpy Impact (@23°C) ft-lbs 4.5 D 256 THERMAL Coefficient of Linear Expansion in/in/°F 3.2 x 10-5 D 696 Burning Rate in/min No burn when D 635 flame removed Flame Spread Index -- 25 E 84 Heat Deflection Temp 264 psi °F 150 D 648 Oil Canning (@140°F) °F Passed D 648
2.02 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners: • Use fasteners designed for wood trim and wood siding (thinner shank, blunt point, full round head) with AZEK®. • Use a highly durable fastener such as stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized. • Staples, small brads and wire nails must not be used as fastening members. • The fasteners should be long enough to penetrate the solid wood substrate a minimum of 1 1/2”. • Standard nail guns work well with AZEK trim products. • Use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trimboards applications. Trimboards 12” or wider, as well as sheets, will require additional fasteners. • Fasteners must be installed no more than 2” from the end of each board. • AZEK should be fastened into a flat, solid substrate. Fastening AZEK into hollow or uneven areas must be avoided. • Pre-drilling is typically not required unless a large fastener is used or product is installed in low temperatures. • 3/8” and 1/2” sheet product is not intended to be ripped into trim pieces. These profiles must be glued to a substrate and mechanically fastened.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-4
B. Adhesives: • Glue all AZEK to AZEK joints such as window surrounds, long fascia runs, etc. with AZEK Adhesive, a cellular pvc cement, to prevent joint separation. • The glue joint should be secured with a fastener and/or fastened on each side of the joint to allow adequate bonding time. • AZEK Adhesive has a working time of 10 minutes and will be fully cured in 24 hours. • If standard pvc cements are used, keep in mind these products typically cure quickly which will result in limited working time and may reduce adhesive strength. • Surfaces to be glued should be smooth, clean and in complete contact with each other. • To bond AZEK to other substrates, various adhesives may be used. Consult adhesive manufacturer to determine suitability. C. Sealants: • Use urethane, polyurethane or acrylic based sealants without silicone. Page 3 of 4 Section 06 66 00
2.03 FINISHES
A. AZEK products do not require paint for protection, but may be painted to achieve a custom color. B. Preparation: • No special surface preparations are required prior to painting - sanding is not necessary for paint adhesion. • Surface must be clean and dry. • If desired, nail holes may be filled with polyurethane or acrylic based caulk. • Use a 100% acrylic latex paint with a Light Reflective Value (LRV) of 55 or higher. • Follow the paint manufacturer’s recommendations to apply.
PART III EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturers instructions: • Comply with manufacturer’s product catalog installation instructions and product technical bulletin instructions. B. Cutting: • AZEK products can be cut using the same tools used to cut lumber. • Carbide tipped blades designed to cut wood work well. Avoid fine tooth metal cutting blades. • Rough edges from cutting may be caused by excessive friction, poor board support, or worn or improper tooling. C. Drilling • AZEK products can be drilled using the same tools used to drill lumber. • Drilling AZEK products is similar to drilling a hardwood. Care should be taken to avoid
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-5
frictional heat buildup. • Use standard woodworking drills. Do not use drills made for normal rigid pvc. • Periodic removal of AZEK shavings from the drill hole may be necessary.
D. Milling • AZEK products can be milled using standard milling machines used to mill lumber. • Relief Angle 20° to 30° • Cutting speed to be optimized with the number of knives and feed rate. E. Routing • AZEK products can be routed using standard router bits and the same tools used to rout lumber. • Carbide tipped router bits are recommended. F. Edge Finishing • Edges can be finished by sanding, grinding or filing with traditional woodworking tools. G. Nail Location • Use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trimboard applications. • Trimboards over 12” or wider, as well as sheets, will require additional fasteners. • Fasteners must be installed no more than 2” from the end of each board. H. Thermal Expansion and Contraction • AZEK products expand and contract with changes in temperature. • Properly fastening AZEK material along its entire length will minimize expansion and contraction. • When properly fastened, allow for 1/8” per 18 foot of AZEK product for expansion and contraction. • Joints between pieces of AZEK should be glued to eliminate joint separation. When gaps are glued on a long run of AZEK, allow expansion and contraction at ends of the run.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 07120 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data, Installation instructions and Material Safety Data Sheets.
B. Submit general recommendations form membrane flashing and waterproofing materials manufacturer for types of flashing required.
C. Submit standard manufacturer's written Warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain membrane flashing, waterproofing membrane, primer, protection board and mastic from one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized installation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with membrane flashing and waterproofing and associated work after substrate construction, openings, and penetration work have been completed and areas are free of moisture.
B. Proceed with membrane flashing and waterproofing and associated work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers, recommendations and warranty requirements. Areas of uncompleted membrane flashing exposed to rain or other sources of moisture will be subject to removal and replacement.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of manufacturer's standard warranty whereby manufacturer agrees to replace or repair membrane flashing and waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING 07120-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING
A. Membrane Flashing and waterproofing: Self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to polyethylene sheeting, formed into uniform flexible strips of thickness shown, or not less than 60 mils of thickness, complying with the following:
1. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum (ASTM D 41 2). 2. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum (ASTM D 41 2). 3. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 25-degrees F (ASTM S 746). 4. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum. 5. Water Absorption: Not more than 0.5 percent weight gain after 48 hours' immersion at 70 degrees F (ASTM 570).
B. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products:
1. Bituthene 3000, W.R. Grace. 2. Miradri, Carlsile Coatings and Waterproofing. 3. Tamko TW-60 4. Tamko TW Moisture Wrap 5. Polyguard window seal weather resistive barrier 6. WaterBlock systems, Waterproof Flashing Membrane HT-Thru Wall Flashing 7. Protecto Wrap
C. Primer: Manufacturer's standard product compatible with membrane.
D. Mastic: Manufacturer's standard product compatible with membrane.
E. Drip edge flashing- 26 gauge- galvanized sheet metal.
F. Flashing-26 gauge-3”x5” galvanized sheet metal. Exterior and interior corners to be manufactured bent.
2.2 SILL PLATE GASKET
A. Provide DOW WEATHERMATE SILL SEAL foam gasket at all exterior perimeter stud wall sill plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND WATERPROOFING 07120-3
3.2 MEMBRANE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for methods of flashing application.
B. Apply primer or mastic in locations to receive membrane flashing, as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Apply and firmly adhere self-adhering membrane flashing. Accurately align flashing strips and maintain uniform laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertightness.
D. Apply deck membrane waterproofing to entire surface and as indicated on the drawings. Apply vertical flashing as shown on drawings to a minimum of 9” vertically. Application of all materials shall follow manufactures recommendations.
E. Apply membrane flashing around exterior windows, exterior doors, and other exterior wall penetrations and as indicated on Drawings. Seal membrane flashing to window and door flanges. Provide 12-inch flashing at window and door heads. Lap ends of flashing 6 inches. Install sample of window and door application for Architect and Owner review and approval.
F. Repair and patch tears, voids, and lapped seams in membrane flashing and waterproofing. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters.
G. Protect membrane flashing and waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 07120
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, flame-spread ratings of 25 or less 24 and smoke-developed ratings of 450 or less.
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following:
B. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) CertainTeed Corp. 2) Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp. 3) Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
C. Manufacturers of Recycled Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: a. US GreenFiber, LLC, Cocoon Cellulose Insulation.
D. Alternate System: Manufacturer of blown-in blanket insulation:
a. BLOW-IN-BLANKET premium insulation system for exterior walls only. http://www.bibs.com
b. BLOW-IN-BLANKET premium insulation system may not be used at UL Fire Rated assemblies.
c. UL Fire Rated assemblies include tenant separation partitions, floor / ceiling assemblies, ceiling / attic assemblies and ceiling / roof assemblies.
2.2 INSULATION PRODUCTS
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
A. Unfaced R-15 Batt Insulation:
1) Exterior walls. In all exterior walls from the bottom plate to top plate of each floor including fireplace chases, all exterior storage closets and fire sprinkler closets. 2) At joist space of exterior walls. 3) In all knee walls of vaulted ceiling rooms, if any. 4) In voids between exterior door jamb and trimmer, including header. 5) In truss space under floors over un-air conditioned/outdoor spaces. 6) In vinyl, VCT, ceramic, or wood mid-floors.
B. R-38 Blown Insulation:
1) All flat attic space above heated area of units including storage closets. 2) Install cardboard baffles for ventilation when required.
C. R-19 Blown Insulation:
1) All attached garage ceilings.
D. R-30 Kraft Paper Faced Batt Insulation
1. Fire Sprinkler closet ceilings. 2. All sloped ceilings; if any.
E. Unfaced R-11 Batt Insulation:
1. In both sides of all party walls. 2. Place insulation within all apartment units and where shown on construction documents.
F. All batts shall be fitted snugly between studs or joists and attached securely in place. Where plumbing pipes occur in exterior walls, insulation shall be placed on the exterior side of the pipes. In odd shaped areas, the batts shall be cut and fitted carefully into the space and around pipes, conduits, etc.
G. Batt Insulation shall be installed to completely surround any wall penetration between separate living units.
H. Certification of “R” Values:
a) Provide contractor with certificate verifying “R” values of material installed upon completion and acceptance of all work.
I. Air Infiltration:
a) Seal all penetrations for control of air infiltration. b) Fire sealing of penetrations required by local ordinance to be done by others.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3
J. Sill seal:
a) Provide DOW WEATHERMATE SILL SEAL Foam gasket at all exterior walls.
K. Clean Up
a) Clean up all debris caused by the work of this section and deposit in location designated by project superintendent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated to ensure a fully insulated building envelope. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
B. Place loose-fill insulation to comply with ASTM C 1015.
C. Comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's "Special Report- Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation.
D. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage.
E. Install safing systems to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements listed in the testing agency's directory for the indicated fire-resistance rating.
END OF SECTION 07210
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data for each type of product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.
B. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Submit Samples for verification: Full-size shingles of each different color and pattern of shingle specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Identify each bundle of shingles with appropriate markings of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Fire-Test-Response Classification: Provide shingles classified according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 as Class A.
F. Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: Provide products identical to those that have passed tests according to ASTM D 3161 or LTL 997.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Work shall comply with shingle manufacturer's recommendations and details
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar sized roofing installation.
C. All work shall comply with requirements of regulatory agencies and conform to local building codes minimum wind uplift resistance and fire resistance.
D. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
E. Deliver materials in sealed packages with Underwriters Laboratories label.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact.
B. Handle and store materials at project site to prevent damage, staining, or other physical damage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage, handling, and protection.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-2
C. Do not stack bundles of shingles more than 4-feet high.
D. Distribute bundles of shingles uniformly, not in concentrated loads on roof.
E. Store rolled goods on end.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with shingles and associated work after substrate construction, openings, and penetration work have been completed and areas are free of moisture.
B. Proceed with shingles and associated work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. Areas of uncompleted membrane flashing exposed to rain or other sources of moisture will be subject to removal and replacement.
C. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces.
D. Do not install shingles when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Asphalt Shingles: Furnish quantity of full-size roofing tiles equal to 3 squares of each type/color/texture of roofing used in the work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of the roofing system with the installation of flashings and trim so that the complete installation is weathertight and in accord with the warranty requirements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. This warranty shall cover, but not be limited to, leaks in the roofing system due to defects in materials and workmanship. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of roofing tiles beyond normal weathering.
B. The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Submit a 40 year written limited warranty signed or printed by manufacturer agreeing to refund or replace, on a prorated basis that includes materials and application labor, asphalt shingles that fail in materials or manufacturing workmanship within the specified warranty period and 5 year non-prorated Umbrella Coverage.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-3
D. Submit a 5 year written limited warranty signed or printed by manufacturer agreeing to replace or, if applicable, hand seal asphalt shingles that fail due to wind blow-offs for winds up to a maximum of 80 miles per hour. All reasonable costs for labor and material will be covered during this period without prorating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Certainteed Corporation. 2. GAF Corporation. 3. ELK Corporation. 4. Owens Corning 5. Tamko
B. Type: Fiberglass-asphalt dimensional shingles to comply with ASTM D 3462, self-sealing.
C. Weight Per Square: 40 Year Shingles
D. Provide selections from manufacturer's standard full range of standard colors (include high albedo colors), blends, and patterns for roofing tiles of type indicated.
E. Provide manufacturer's standard ridge and valley shingles.
F. Provide fungae and algae resistant shingles with stain inhibitor.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Felt Base Sheet Underlayment: 15# non-perforated organic felt, 36 inches wide to comply with ASTM D 4869 Type I. Installation as recommended by roofing tile manufacturer for application required.
B. Base Sheet Underlayment: Tamko TW Metal and Tile Underlayment. Installation as recommended by roofing tile manufacturer for application required.
C. Metal Flashing and kick-out flashing: 5-inch x 5-inch (or as detailed), (minimum 24 gauge where exposed to the weather & minimum 26 gauge where not exposed to the weather), G-90 galvanized coating, corrosion-resistant, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and A 90. D. Asphalt Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586.
E. Roofing Nails: Hot-dip-galvanized steel, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails, minimum 3/8-inch-diameter head 12 gage roofing nails, and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Material of nails shall match materials selected for flashing to prevent galvanic action.
F. Continuous Ridge Vent: Owens Corning VentSure® 4-Foot Strip Heat & Moisture Ridge Vents.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with shingle manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
B. Install valleys complying with ARMA and NRCA instructions. Construct closed valleys.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT
A. Install felt underlayment as recommended by roofing tile manufacturer.
B. Install one layer of Palisade Synthetic Roofing Underlayment - base-sheet underlayment lapped course. Installation shall be as recommended by the underlayment manufacturers publish instructions.
C. Underlayment for roof slopes lower than 4:12 pitch and at all rakes, transitions, saddles, crickets and valleys: Tamko TW Metal and Tile Underlayment Tarco LeakBarrier PS200ht Ice and Water Armor Installation shall be as recommended by the underlayment manufacturers publish instructions.
3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Secure all felt with nails through metal disks.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL FLASHING
A. Install metal flashing and trim according to details and instructions of NRCA's "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual": Section "Asphalt Roofing," and ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual and conform to all SMACNA (architectural sheet metal manual) details applicable.
B. Flashing to include, but not limited to step flashing, kick-out flashing, diverter shingles, DL drip edge, and continuous flashing.
C. Form all flashing accurately to the dimensions and shapes required with sharp and straight lines and angles. Hem exposed edges ¼ inch on underside.
D. Install step flashing to extend a minimum of 5 inches on roof deck and 5 inches up vertical surface. Provide step flashing at all roof and wall intersections that are parallel to the slope of the roof. Extend lowest flashing shingle (kick-out flashing) past fascia or trim and bend slightly to divert water away from corner as recommended by the roofing manufacturer.
E. Install continuous flashing at roof and wall intersections that are perpendicular to the slope of the roof.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-5
F. Install continuous prefinished DL drip edge at fascia. Install plumbing and roof vents. Install flashing and vents to allow for expansion and contraction of materials.
G. Seal flashing and vents as required providing watertight installation.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLES
A. Start shingle installation as soon as dry-in and necessary flashing work are complete.
B. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions.
C. Align shingles during installation to provide straight, even, and parallel courses, making minor adjustments as necessary. Install shingles parallel to ground level. Fasten each with required number of nails in each shingle.
D. Beginning at eaves, install double layer of shingles as starter course.
E. Provide consistent overhang at fascia.
F. Accurately fit shingles to vents and flashing. Trim shingles straight and accurately at valleys and fascia.
G. Insure that all roof penetrations are waterproofed, including work of other trades that penetrate the roof.
H. Nail gun installation not allowed
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessory items in coordination with roofing tile installation and in strict compliance with installation instructions and specified requirements.
B. Install ridge vent according to manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING
A. Install metal flashing as indicated and in accordance with specified requirements.
B. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal 10 inches under tile and turn metal up at least 2 inches.
3.8 CLEANING AND FINAL PREPARATION
A. Remove and replace any broken shingles.
END OF SECTION 07311
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 07460 CEMENT FIBERBOARD SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Work under this section is subject to the provisions of the contract documents which in any way affect the work specified herein.
1.1 Scope
A. Furnish and install HardiePanel and fiber-cement siding, HardieTrim fascia and moulding and accessories where shown on drawings or as specified herein.
B. Coordinate this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequence of installation.
C. Work in other sections affecting this work.
1. Wood framing and bracing 06100
2. Sheathing 06112
3. Insulation 07210
1.2 Quality Assurance
A. Submittals: within sixty (60) days of owner's notice
1. Submit three 6 inch x 6 inch pieces of HardiePanel claddings in texture and widths shown and specified herein.
2. Submit three copies of specifications, installation data and other pertinent manufacturer's literature.
1.3 Product Handling
A. Stack HardiePanel claddings on edge or lay flat on a smooth, level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
1.4 Job Conditions
A. Nominal 2 inch x 4 inch wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of weather-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1½ inch face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned.
B. Install weather-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
C. Repair any punctures or tears in the weather-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding.
D. Protect siding from other trades.
1.5 Warranty
A. Limited product warranty against manufacturing defects for Hardiepanels for 30 years and Hardietrim for 30 years
B. Workmanship: application limited warranty for 30 years.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 CEMENT FIBERBOARD SIDING 07460-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HardiePanel Vertical Cladding / Hardie Fascia and Moulding
A. Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to comply with ASTM Standard Specification C1186 Grade II, Type A.
B. Siding to meet the following building code compliance National Evaluation Report No. NER 405 (BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI); City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862; Metro Dade County, Florida Acceptance No. 94-1234.04; US Department of Housing and Urban Development Materials Release 1263a; California DSA PS-019; and City of New York MEA 223-93-M.Non-asbestos fiber-cement siding to be non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM test method E136.
C. Refer to exterior elevations for combination of siding patterns.
D. Trim Type: 4/4 Boards Cedarmill Finish ¾” Harditrim, 5/4 Boards Cedarmill Finish 1” Harditrim, 4/4 Batten Boards Cedarmill and 1-1/2" Artisan Accent Trim Cedarmill Finish (widths as shown on plans).
E. Hardiepanel, non-vented, Cedarmill finish.
F. Hardisoffit Panels, vented and non-vented, Cedarmill finish.
G. Provide Sturdi Mount Fiber Cement Mounting Blocks at ALL wall mounted light fixtures. Size as required for the fixture selected (www.sturdibuild.com).
Coordinate and detail for adhered masonry and stucco conditions.
H. 15# felt Plank Flashing at all plank butt joints.
I. Provide Hardie H-Molding at Hardisoffit Panel joints. 2.2 Fasteners
A. Wood framing: 6d common corrosion resistant nails.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Surface Conditions
A. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work.
3.2 Installation - Harditrim trim, moulding and H-Molding.
A. Install flashing around all wall openings.
B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must penetrate minimum ¾ inch or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security.
C. Place fasteners no closer than ¾ inch and no further than 2 inch from side edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch from end. Fasten maximum 16 inch on center.
D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 CEMENT FIBERBOARD SIDING 07460-3
E. Trim inside corner with single board.
F. Install single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten Harditrim board to Harditrim board.
G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding.
H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.
I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
J. Install Harditrim trim over structural subtrim.
E. Overlay siding with Harditrim moulding at windows, doors and inside corners.
F. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints.
G. Overlay siding with single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten Harditrim boards to Harditrim boards.
3.3 Installation - Hardiepanel Siding
A. Install panels according to the manufacturers published instructions.
B. Allow minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge of siding.
C. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.
D. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
E. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings.
F. Provide 30# felt flashing at all plank butt joints.
G. Use off-stud metal joiner when vertical joints occur between framing members. Position metal joiner so that the bottom lip is resting on the solid course of planks. Fasten plank to the framing. Position and fasten abutting plank into place insuring that the lower edges of the two planks align. Locate metal joiner centrally behind the joint. Locate off-stud splices a minimum of two stud cavities from wall corners and stagger all subsequent course splices at minimum 24 inch intervals when located in the same wall cavity.
H. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardieplank lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.
3.4 Finishing
A. Finish unprimed siding with minimum one coat high quality, alkali-resistant primer and one coat of either 100% acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoat or two coats high quality, alkali-resistant, 100% acrylic or latex, flat sheen, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. END OF SECTION 07460
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07611 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes galvanized sheet steel roofing, associated flashings, and underlayment.
1. Provide fascias and counterflashings.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Placement of flashing reglets and accessories. 2. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of flashing reglets and accessories. 3. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Plywood roof deck substrate. 4. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Section 07623 - Gutters and Downspouts. 6. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers. 7. Section 09900 - Painting and Coatings: Field painting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 4. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 6. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. ASTM D2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 8. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 9. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-2
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Submit data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics
D. Samples: 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal roofing mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical seam, external corner, internal corner, valley, ridge, junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material, and finish. 2. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
a. Submit results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests: 1. Air Infiltration - ASTM E 283-84 2. Water Infiltration - ASTM E 331-86 3. Wind Uplift - U.L.110
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal requirements and standard details, except as otherwise noted.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 MOCKUP
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for mockup.
B. Construct mockup of sheet metal roofing, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, including associated attachments, flashings, joints and junctions, control or expansion joints, terminating items, and eave protection.
C. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
D. Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-3
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate with Work of Section 03100 and 04810 for installing recessed flashing reglets.
C. Coordinate with all mechanical and plumbing roof penetrations to ensure these penetrations are located at the center of metal roofing pan between seams.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for custom sheet metal roofing. Galvalume material shall have a twenty year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or perforation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 24 Gauge Unfinished Metal shall be “ZINC GREY, Kynar 500” as manufacture by Berridge Manufacturing Company. Steel sheet width as required to accomplish seams at 16” o.c.
B. Roofing system: Berridge “CEE-LOCK SNAP LOCK” standing seam roof with Vinyl Weatherseal.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel same material and finish as roofing metal, with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners.
D. Provide CONTINUOUS CEE-RIB clips and CONTINUOUS ZEE-RIB clips to all metal roof areas.
E. Underlayment over roof decks at ALL roof slopes and at all saddles, crickets and valleys: TAMKO TW METAL AND TILE 75 MIL THICK UNDERLAYMENT
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-4
Follow the metal roof manufacturers’ recommendations for watertight integrity at the fasteners penetrations.
F. Primer: Galvanized iron type.
G. Sealant: sealant as specified in Section 07900.
H. Sealant: Polyurethane and Silicone. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
I. Eave Protection Sheet: ASTM D226, Type II, commonly referred to as No. 30, unperforated asphalt saturated organic felts.
J. Eave Protection Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type IV, glass fiber felts.
K. Reglets: Surface mounted and Recessed type, galvanized steel face and ends covered with plastic tape; SM manufactured by FRY REGLET.
L. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
M. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of 18” x 30” size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Form sections shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, to interlock with sheet.
C. Fabricate starter strips of same material as sheet, continuous, to interlock with sheet.
D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths
E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1 inch ; miter and seam corners.
F. Form material with 1” standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to valleys and eaves.
C. Verify deck is dry. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened.
D. Verify correct placement of wood nailers.
E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located.
F. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
G. Verify that all mechanical and plumbing roof penetrations are located at the center of metal roofing pan between seams.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection.
B. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment.
C. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
D. Install surface mounted reglets to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
E. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Eave Protection: Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails.
1. Apply eave protection sheet as recommended and detailed by manufacturer.
2. Extend eave protection sheet minimum 4 feet upslope beyond interior face of exterior wall.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-6
B. General Roofing Installation Requirements:
1. Apply underlayment over entire roof area in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges 6 inches and nail in place. 2. Cleat and seam joints. 3. Use plastic cement for joints between metal and bitumen and for joints between metal and felts. 4. Solder intersection joints. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution, rinse with water. 5. At valley, fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches oc. 6. Follow the metal roof manufacturers’ recommendations for watertight integrity at the fasteners penetrations. 7. Follow the metal roof manufacturers’ published installation instructions to meet all local and national codes.
C. Standing Seam Roofing Installation:
1. Conform to all SMACNA details applicable. 2. Space standing seams at 16 inch oc. Coordinate with all mechanical and plumbing roof penetrations to ensure these penetrations are located at the center of metal roofing pan between seams. 3. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. 4. Lock cleats into seams. 5. Stagger transverse joints of roofing sheets. 6. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. 7. Finish standing seams 1-1/2 inch high. 8. Make first fold 1/4 inch wide single fold and second fold 1/2 inch wide, providing locked portion of standing seam, 5 plies in thickness. 9. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. 10. Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold. 11. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. 12. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets. 13. At valley, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches OC. 14. At eaves without gutters, hook pan over edge strip. Extend edge strip up under metal roofing 4 inches and secure with nails at 4 inches OC, at 1 inch from upper end. 15. At eaves with gutters, loose lock end of roofing pans into gutters.
D. Built-In Gutters [And Downspouts] Installation.
1. Conform to all SMACNA details applicable. 2. Refer to section 07623.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 7 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07611-7
E. Flashing Installation:
1. Install reglets in accordance with Section 03100 and 04810. 2. Conform to all SMACNA details applicable. 3. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 7 of 7 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Shop Drawings of all shop-fabricated sheet metal work, showing details, material types, weights, gauges, joining, sealing, and fastening.
B. Submit Samples of each type and profile of sheet metal with labels attached.
C. Submit standard written Warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work shall comply with 'Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," latest edition, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
B. Aluminum sheet metal work shall comply with @Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate," ASTM B 209-81.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of the flashings and trim with the installation of the roofing system and protruding materials and accessories so that the complete installation is weathertight and in accord with the warranty requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of standard warranty covering materials and workmanship of sheet metal flashing and trim in conjunction with the warranty of the roof system. Warranty shall cover the watertight integrity of the flashing, including repair and replacement of components which are deemed faulty or in or in disrepair during the warranty period. Such items shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-Hl4, shop finish, minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275), commercial quality, lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; at least 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick. Minimum thickness 24 gage.
C. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet, and minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) except at least 0.0937 inch (2.4 mm) thick for applications where burning (welding) is involved.
2.2 FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Prefinished DL drip flashing at roof overhangs.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn5O.
B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type.
C. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
D. Fasteners:
1. Ferrous Metal to Wood: Hot-dip galvanized ring-shank roofing nails of not less than 1- inch length, conforming to Federal Specification FF-N-A105B(3), Type II, Style 20. 2. Aluminum: Stainless steel or aluminum nails or screws, complying with 36 manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Flashing for Sanitary Vents: 6-pound lead sheet.
2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Use material of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, of required size, grade, and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product.
1. Minimum Lap: 6 inches. 2. Minimum thickness 24 gage. 3. ‘Z’ flashing above all windows, doors and openings. Cap flashings as detailed.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible.
B. Fasten items as indicated or as required to provide rigid, secure installation free of warp or wind. Provide fastenings which do not impair the watertight integrity of the installation.
3.2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Form sheet metal work with clean, sharp, and uniform lines. Hem exposed edges ¼ inch.
B. Provide expansion joints in metal trim a minimum of 15 feet in any direction, using longest lengths available for a continuous configuration.
C. Roof -Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
D. Vent Stack Flashings: Fabricate using sheet lead in compliance with roofing manufacturer's instructions.
E. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
F. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges of galvanized sheet metal to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Weld seams of aluminum sheet metal. Rivet joints for additional strength as required.
G. Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), unless pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work.
H. Separations: Separate non-compatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt mastic or other permanent separation.
END OF SECTION 07620
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07623 GUTTERS, LEADERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Shop Drawings of all shop-fabricated sheet metal gutter, leader, and downspout work, showing details, material types, weights, gauges, joining, sealing, and fastening.
B. Submit Samples of each type and profile of sheet metal gutter, leader, and downspout with labels attached.
C. Submit Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work shall comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal manual," latest edition, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
B. Aluminum sheet metal work shall comply with 'Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate," ASTM B 209-81.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-Hl4, shop finish, minimum thickness of 0.027 inch.
2.2 PREFINISHED SEAMLESS ALUMINUM GUTTERS, LEADERS, AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. Downspout Size: 3”x4” (3” round @ Cabana Building) x .032 with straps at 5’- 0” on center maximum. Provide aluminum downspouts spacing and locations as per all applicable local, state and national codes.
B. Minimum Depth of Seamless Aluminum OGEE Gutters: 5 X 4 inches x .032 (5” half round at Pool Equipment and Cabana buildings).
C. Finish aluminum gutters, downspouts, straps and similar exposed units with baked-on, acrylic shop finish; 1.0-mil (0.025-mm) dry film thickness.
1. Color: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors to match metal roof.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 GUTTERS, LEADERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07623-2
D. Cabana and Pool Equipment: refer to drawings for half round .032 prefinished aluminum gutters and 3” round x .032 downspouts.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type.
B. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum nails or screws, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. Support gutters with hidden hangers.
D. Pre-Cast reinforced concrete splash blocks: 12” wide x 30” long x 3-1/2” thick.
E. Support Gutters with Hidden Hangers anchored to fascia above the water line. 1. RAYTEC-Hangtite (Gutterworks.com, 1-888-376-6871) spaced at 30” O.C. 2. Half round Rival hangers at Pool Equipment and Cabana Buildings spaced at 30” O.C.
2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Use material of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, of required size, grade, and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. Support gutters with straps or clips.
B. Fasten items with straps as indicated or as required to provide rigid, secure installation free of warp or wind. Provide fastenings which do not impair the watertight integrity of the installation. Gutter pin anchors not allowed.
C. Form sheet metal work with clean, sharp, and uniform lines. Hem exposed edges.
D. Separations: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt mastic or other permanent separation.
E. Install beehive'-type strainer guards at conductor heads, removable for cleaning.
F. Install and seal end caps.
G. Extend downspouts to splash blocks or as detailed.
END OF SECTION 07623
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 GUTTERS, LEADERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07623-3
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VENTS
A. Low-profile aluminum gravity attic ventilators with aluminum flanges for fastening to roof deck. (Quantity: Provide additional attic ventilators as required to meet total ventilation calculated by code for each building) B. Ridge Vents: Shingle (or metal roof) over installation type with wind deflector. C. Gable Vents: Painted Galvanized Metal Units. See elevations for configurations. D. Soffit vents: Continuous metal soffit vents or vented soffit boards as detailed.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following:
1. Gibraltar Building. 2. Lomanco. 3. Master Flow. 4. Trimline Building Products. 5. Cor-A-Vent, Inc. 6. Air Vent Inc.
2.3 LOW PROFILE GRAVITY VENTILATIONS
A. Material: Embossed aluminum.
B. Number of Louvered Sides: 3.
C. Size and Quantity: As required by manufacturer for adequate ventilation of attics in addition to ridge vents to comply with all applicable codes. Provide Shop Drawing Layouts Indicating any additional gravity vent units required to comply with all applicable codes.
D. Accessories: Aluminum insect screen.
E. Finish aluminum low-profile gravity ventilators with mill finish and primed for field painting. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying finishes.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2
2.4 RIDGE VENTS
A. Match roof pitches B. Rigid black plastic C. Wind Deflector. D. Lomanco® Metal Roof Ridge Vent Kit® at all standing seam metal roofs. E. Cor-A-Vent Model # V-600TE for ALL standing seam metal roof ridges. F. Cor-A-Vent Model # V-600 for ALL asphalt shingle roof ridges.
2.5 ROOF TO WALL VENTS
A. Metal-Era: Hi-Perf Ridge Vent (Prefinished metal cap color to match roof) 1600 Airport Road Waukesha WI 53188 phone: 800-558-2162 fax: 800-373-9156 [email protected]
2.6 GABLE VENTS
A. Painted Galvanized Metal, fully welded, reinforced and storm proof. B. Insect Screens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Coordinate with installation of roof deck, vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing to ensure combined elements are secure, waterproof, and weathertight.
END OF SECTION 07720
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work specified in this section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES FIRESTOPPING: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in, or construction joints between, fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION
Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.
B. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.
C. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
D. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
E. Expansion joints in walls and floors.
F. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
G. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.
1.04 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections, including:
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers 3. Section 04200 - Masonry Work 4. Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster 5. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall Systems 6. Section 13080 - Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control 7. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression and Supervisory Systems 8. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 9. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation 10. Section 15300 - Fire Protection 11. Section 15400 - Plumbing 12. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops"
B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”
C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.
1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Firestop Devices (XHJI) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Joint Systems (XHBN) g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)
2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).
E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”
F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus”
G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”
H. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”
I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments
J. All major building codes and 2012 IBC.
K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
L. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code
THROUGH-PENETRATION UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Fire Stopping Systems UL Classification System
Construction Type Of System Penetrated Construction Identification
1 No Penetrating Items: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 0001-0999 2 Metallic Pipes, Conduit or Tubing: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 1001-1999 3 Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit or Tubing: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 2001-2999 4 Electric Cables: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 3001-3999 Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
5 Cable, Trays with Electric Cables: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 4001-4999 6 Insulated Pipes: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 5001-5999 7 Electrical Bussduct Penetrations: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 6001-6999 8 Mechanical Ductwork Penetrations: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 7001-7999 9 Multiple Penetrations Through Common Openings: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 8000-8999
Construction Penetration F Floor penetration W Wall penetration C Either floor or wall penetration
Type of Construction A- Concrete floors equal to of less than 5-inches thick Concrete floors greater than 5- B- inches thick J- Concrete or masonry walls equal to or less than 8-inches thick Concrete of masonry walls greater than 8-inches K- thick L- Framed walls
JOINT UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM UL Classification Fire-Resistant Joint Systems System
Joint System Movement Joint Width Capability
1 Floor-to-Floor FF D 0000-0999 2 Wall-to-Wall WW D 0000-0999 3 Floor-to-Wall: FW D 0000-0999 4 Head of Wall: HW D 0000-0999
Movement Capability D- Has movement capability
Joint Width 0000-0999 Less than or equal to 2-inches
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems and fire-resistive joint systems that comply with specified requirements of tested systems.
B. Fire stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated.
C. Proposed fire stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
D. Fire stop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar qualified tested system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment documents must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of qualified tested firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300.
B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and document details when no qualified tested system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in document.
C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.
1.08 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Installation Responsibility: assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single sole source firestop specialty contractor.
C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following qualifications:
FM 4991 Approved Contractor UL Approved Contractor Hilti Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor
D. Firm with not less than 3 years experience with fire stop installation.
E. Successfully completed not less that 3 comparable scale projects using similar systems.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.
B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site.
C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable.
E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet.
E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems (XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory; provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below:
1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma 800-879-8000/www.us.hilti.com
2. Substitution requests shall be considered in accordance with contract provisions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E 814 or UL 2079 tested for specific fire- rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.
B. Pre-installed firestop devices for use with noncombustible and combustible pipes (closed and open systems), conduit, and/or cable bundles penetrating concrete floors and/or gypsum walls, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 680-P Cast-In Place Firestop Device a. Add Aerator adaptor when used in conjunction with aerator (“sovent”) system. 2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit for use with tub installations. 3. Hilti CP 680-M Cast-In Place Firestop Device for use with noncombustible penetrants. 4. Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve for use with cable penetrations.
C. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 5. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant
D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant
E. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and other gaps, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant
F. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gap between top of wall and metal profile deck; as a backer for spray material.
1. Hilti CP 777 Speed Plugs 2. Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips
G. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
H. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 5. I. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 2. Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug
J. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad
K. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar 2. Hilti CP 644 Firestop Collar 3. Hilti CP 648E/648S Wrap Strips
L. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board
M. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board
N. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 7 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
O. For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable:
1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug
P. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
Q. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is equal to the time rating of construction joint assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.
2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion.
3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.
4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings, penetrations and construction joints to ensure that the fire stop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration fire stop systems. Coordinate construction and sizing of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.
C. Coordinate fire stopping with other trades so that obstructions are not placed in the way prior to the installation of the fire stop systems.
D. Do not cover up through-penetration fire stop and joint system installations that will become Concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by the building inspector, per requirements of Section 109, International Building Code 2000, ed.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 8 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through- penetration and construction joint materials.
1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard.
D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.
E. Manufacturer’s Field Services: During Installation, provide periodic destructive testing inspections to assure proper installation/application. After installation is complete, submit findings in writing indicating whether or not the installation of the tested system identified was installed correctly.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION & DOCUMENTATION
A. The firestop contractor is to supply documentation for each single application addressed. This documentation is to identify each penetration and joint location on the entire project.
A.1 The Documentation Form for through penetrations is to include:
1 A Sequential Location Number 2 The Project Name 3 Date of Installation 4 Detailed description of the penetrations location 5 Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number 6 Type of assembly penetrated 7 A detailed description of the size and type of penetrating item 8 Size of opening 9 Number of sides of assemblies addressed 10 Hourly rating to be achieved 11 Installers Name Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 9 of 10 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
A.2 The Documentation Form for Construction Joints is to include:
1 A Sequential Location Number 2 The Project Name 3 Date of Installation 4 Detailed description of the Construction Joints location 5 Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number 6 Type of Construction Joint 7 The Width of the Joint 8 The Lineal Footage of the Joint 9 Number of sides addressed 10 Hourly rating to be achieved 11 Installers Name
B. Copies of these documents are to be provided to the general contractor at the completion of the project.
C. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words: "Warning -Through Penetration Firestop System-Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's Name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-Penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of Installation. 5. Through-Penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's Name.
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as work progresses.
4.00 LABOR USE TO INSTALL FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. To ensure complete harmony on the project site, the installation of each scope of work is to be performed jurisdictionally correct per existing trade agreements.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 10 of 10 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Submit standard manufacturer's written Warranty.
C. Submit Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
D. Submit Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions - Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to precede application of paints, water repellents, or special coatings and to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of manufacturer's standard warranty whereby manufacturer agrees to replace or repair membrane waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 6 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. B. To comply with 'UL' U900D requirements when in fire-rated walls or partitions. C. All sealants shall meet LEED Low VOC content requirements.
2.2 MULTI-PART POURABLE POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Applications: Joints in floors, decks expansion and control joints, Paving expansion and control joints, and similar locations, which are exposed to foot or vehicular traffic.
B. Base Polymer: Urethane.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant SL2." 2. Tremco "THC-900”
2.3 MULTI-PART CUSTOM FORMULATED COLOR NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Applications: Exterior and interior joints in stone walls including expansion joints, exterior and interior perimeter joints of assemblies in exterior walls such as window walls, windows, louvers and door frames.
B. Base Polymer: Urethane.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Sonneborn “Sonolastic NP 2” 2. Tremco "Dymeric 240, and 240fc”
2.4 SINGLE-PART NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Applications:
1. Seats of exterior and interior metal thresholds, saddles and sills. 2. Interior joints at wall materials, which adjoin columns, overhead concrete slabs or exterior walls, except as, detailed. 3. Interior locations where small voids between materials require filling for first-class painting or sound sealing. 4. Interior sight exposed framing cracks and joints (not otherwise specified or detailed) as required to ensure tight, light-proof construction.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 6 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3
5. Joints and recesses between metal frames and interior masonry, interior gypsum wallboard, and interior concrete construction, except as otherwise specified. 6. Interior sight exposed joints not otherwise specified. 7. Interior joints between all plumbing fixtures and the wall. 8. Exterior joints and openings where sealing is required to provide a complete, watertight installation. 9. Exterior and interior building control and expansion joints not specifically detailed otherwise. 10. Exterior and interior joints of exterior wall penetrations.
B. Base Polymer: Urethane.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP1” 2. Tremco "Dymonic”
2.5 SINGLE-PART ACID-CURING SILICONE SEALANT
A. Applications: Control joints in ceramic tile walls and between ceramic tile and abutting non-porous surfaces.
B. Base Polymer: Acid-curing silicone.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Dow Corning 2. General Electric 3. Pecora 4. Rhone-Povlenc 5. Tremco 6. Sonneborn
2.6 ACRYLIC SILICONIZED SEALANT
A. Application: Interior perimeters of windows, doors frames & trim work.
B. 45 Year warranty
C. Paintable
2.7 INTERIOR ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Applications:
1. Interior concealed joints where sealing is required to reduce 53 transmission of airborne sound.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 6 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non- staining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
2.8 TAPE SEALANT
A. Applications:
1. Resilient preformed gasket at acoustical partition ceiling/floor intersections.
2.9 PRE-FORMED FOAM SEALANT
A. Applications:
1. Concealed building joint closures, except where another type is indicated.
2.10 FIRESTOPPING
A. Applications:
1. At all penetrations through fire rated construction and perimeters per UL tested assemblies.
Contractor is to submit all applicable details issued by the fire caulk & sleeve manufacturers that meet all the UL fire rated assemblies’ and meet all local code requirements.
Obtain approval of all materials, details and applications from the local building officials and Authorities Having Jurisdiction before the beginning of construction.
Maintain a bound notebook containing all the required fire-stopping details and applications as published by the fire-stop manufacturers. This notebook shall be available at the jobsite trailer for the AHJ review.
Provide a mock-up of all these applications for the AHJ approval.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product from one of the following manufacturers:
1. G.E. Sealants. 2. W.R. Grace Construction Products.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 6 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5
3. Hilti 4. 3M 5. IPC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
D. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Building Thermal Envelope: The building thermal envelope shall be durably sealed to limit infiltration to meet 2009 International Energy code with Local Amendments. The sealing methods between dissimilar materials shall allow for differential expansion and contraction. The following shall be caulked, gasketed, weatherstripped or otherwise sealed with an air barrier material, suitable film or solid material: i. All joints, seams and penetrations. ii. Site built windows, door, and skylights. iii. Openings between windows and door assemblies and their respective jambs and framing. iv. Utility penetrations. v. Dropped ceilings or chases adjacent to the thermal envelope. vi. Knee walls. vii. Walls and ceilings separating exterior spaces from conditioned spaces. viii. Behind tubs and showers on exterior walls. ix. Common walls between dwelling units. x. Exterior perimeter wall sole plates. xi. Other sources of infiltration.
C. Comply with ASTM C 1193.
D. Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications.
E. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 6 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6
F. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely so filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
G. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07920
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 6 SECTION 08115 METAL CLAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data and Door Schedule.
B. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated, wind and impact resistant and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. Fire-rated doors shall bear designated UL labels. Wind and impact resistant doors shall bear designated TDI labels according to zone in which the project is located.
C. Submit standard manufacturer's written Warranty.
D. Fire-Rated Doors: Labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing per ASTM E 152.
E. Wind and impact resistant 1. All doors shall bear designated TDI labels for wind, air filtration, water resistance and impact resistance according to the zone in which the project is located. 2. Provide tempered glass as required by all applicable buildings and safety codes.
F. Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR, Part 1201.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of steel door manufacturer's standard warranty whereby manufacturer agrees to replace or repair doors that exhibit peeling or cracking of primer. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 METAL CLAD DOORS 08115-2
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Pease. 2. Premdor/ Masonite. 3. Therma-Tru. 4. Builders First Source.
2.2 METAL CLAD DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: 1-3/4-inch, 25 gauge electro-zinc plated steel, polystyrene foam filled, steel- edge, embossed Masonite HD 2 Panel Plank Camber Top Door with No Glass design, reinforced at hinges and locks. Pre-hung in adjustable metal jambs at fire rated doors. Pre-hung in 4-1/2-inch rabbited jambs at non-fire rated doors. R-Value of 11.69.
B. Exterior Doors: 1-3/4-inch, 25 gauge electro-zinc plated steel, polystyrene foam filled reinforced at hinges and locks. Pre-hung in 4-1/2-inch rabbited jambs. Full lite at doors per schedule.
C. Glaze doors at factory with tempered insulated glass, Low-E SHGC= .30 or better.
D. Pre-hung doors: center hinge to be self closing, adjustable, spring loaded. Provide additional spring loaded hinges as required to close and latch the door conforming to all applicable codes.
E. All doors to have a smooth surface 10” from the floor to adhere to ICC / ANSI A117.1-2003, section 404.2.9.
2.3 FABRICATION AND FINISHING
A. Facings shall be formed such that they return into a continuous groove in wood stiles and no contact occurs between outside and inside face.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Doors shall be fit to header to adjustable (handicap acceptable) thresholds.
C. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100, fire rated assemblies NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 METAL CLAD DOORS 08115-3
D. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware that is not surface applied.
E. All adhesives and finishes to have low VOC content.
F. Finishes:
1. Metal Doors: Bonderized and primed for field painting. 2. Door hinges finish to match balance of door hardware. Refer to Section 08710 Door Hardware finish. DO NOT PAINT HINGES.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with approved Shop Drawings and door manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Install doors to comply with referenced quality standard.
C. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels.
E. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
F. Align factory-fitted doors in frames for uniform clearances.
G. After installation all scratched, abraded, or otherwise damaged areas of shop prime coat shall be wire-brushed, sanded, and touched-up with quick drying primer to comply with manufacturer's instructions, ready for finish painting. Do not paint weatherstripping and hinges.
H. Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect.
I. Weatherstripping: Provide manufacturer's standard magnetic weatherstripping.
J. Sealing: seal all joints and add sealant under threshold. Refer to Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
END OF SECTION 08115
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and door schedule.
B. Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.1-A.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors complying with Architectural Woodwork Institute 'Custom Grade Standards and Specifications" Section 1300.
B. Provide doors complying with applicable requirements of U.S. Standard CS-171, as modified by International Industry Standard of National Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. All wood doors shall be delivered to site after concrete has dried.
C. Doors shall be stored flat on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilated area. Cover doors to keep clean, but allow circulation. Doors stored for more than 7 days shall have ends primed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Algoma. 2. Masonite. 3. Huttig, Delta Millwork. 4. Eggers Industries 5. Premdor. 6. Royal. 7. Weyerhaeuser.
2.2 WOOD DOORS
A. Hollow Core Doors for Opaque Finish: 1-3/8-inch doors, Masonite Anniversary Collection Camber Top 2 Panel Plank Cheyenne Smooth Door, custom grade as defined in AWI
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2
Quality Standards, Section 300. Primed surfaces and edges. Face veneer 1/8-inch hardboard, core construction AWI Type J, with 1-1/8-inch stiles. Pre-hung in solid wood jambs.
B. Door Frames: Milled from 3/4-inch stock.
C. Hinges: Finish, to match door hardware. DO NOT PAINT.
D. Doors at the ANSI units to have a smooth surface 10” from the floor to adhere to ICC / ANSI A117.1-2003, section 404.2.9.
2.3 FABRICATION AND FINISHING
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated and to comply with referenced quality standard.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware that is not surface applied.
D. Finish: Prime for field painting.
E. All adhesives and finishes to have low VOC content in accordance with LEED certification requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with door manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Install doors to comply with referenced quality standard.
C. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
D. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
E. Bottom Clearance: 1/4-inch above finished floor and 3/4-inch to allow for air circulation.
F. Align factory-fitted doors in frames for uniform clearances.
G. Clean soil, smudge marks, and handling defects from doors by sanding.
H. Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 08211
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data for doors, including details of construction and factory-finishing specifications. B. Submit finish samples for factory-finished doors. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing per ASTM E 2074.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors." And Architectural Wood Work Institute.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STILE AND RAIL DOORS: Specialty Doors at Pavilion.
A. Manufacturer: 1. Interior Grade & Exterior Grade Doors: full and ¾ lite with bottom panel at exterior doors and raised panel at interior doors. 2. Energy Star qualified.
B. Thickness and Size: As scheduled.
C. Species: Hardwood, Paint Grade.
D. Construction: Pegged mortise and tendon construction.
E. Flush Panels: 1-3/4” thick.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-2
F. Glazing: Clear single glazed safety glass at interior doors and double glazed safety insulating glass, Low-E w/ Argon: U-factor = 0.41 , SHGC = 0.30 at exterior doors. Energy Star qualified at exterior doors.
G. Pre-Hung Doors: Use ADA complaint Thresholds at exterior units.
H. Hinges: Finish, to match door hardware. DO NOT PAINT.
I. Transoms: Provide double glazed insulating glass transoms with matching species at all scheduled locations.
J. Finish: Units to be Field Finished.
2.2 FABRICATION AND FINISHING
A. Factory fabricate doors to suit frame-opening sizes and to comply with referenced quality standard.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. All adhesives and finishes to have low VOC content.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) clearance at jambs, heads, and meeting stiles and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at bottom. At sills, provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) clearance from bottom of door.
B. Repair, refinish, or replace doors damaged during installation as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION 08212
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 08315 DRAFTSTOP & ATTIC ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain access doors from one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Obtain Architect's approval of sizes that may vary from those indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Bar-Co, Inc. Div., Alfab, Inc. 2. Bilco. 3. Cesco Products. 4. Werner Co. 5. J.L. Industries. 6. Karp Associates, Inc. 7. Milcor, Inc. 8. Nystrom, Inc. 9. The Williams Bros. Corporation of America. 10. Precision Ladders, LLC 11. Bessler Stairway Company
2.2 DRAFTSTOP & ATTIC ACCESS DOORS
A. Doors: Commercial quality, 18-guage cold rolled steel sheet. Door size: 22” x 30” clear opening.
B. Frames: Commercial quality, 18-guage cold rolled steel. Provide 1/4-inch mounting holes in 1-inch flange.
C. Hinges: Concealed pin-type, spring-loaded for self-closing operation.
D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard smoke gaskets.
E. Door and Frame assembly to be 1 hour fire rated (insulated at ceiling access).
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 DRAFTSTOP & ATTIC ACCESS DOORS 08315-2
F. Apartment Buildings: Attic access ladder: BE-119 30" x 60" 1HR Fire Rated Folding Attic Stair. 30” x 60” , 1 Hour Fire Rated Ceiling Access Door and steel frame with Integral Wood Folding Stairway (350# rated) - as manufactured by Bessler Stairway Company 3807 Lamar Ave. • Memphis, TN 38118 901-795-9200 • FAX 901-795-1253
G. Apartment Buildings and Pool Equipment Building : 36” x 36” Fire Rated Ceiling access door: JL Industries - FD3 SERIES - 1 Hour Fire Rated Ceiling access door for drywall. Listed by Warnock Hersey for Ceilings 36" x 36". Provide keyed lock.
2.3 FABRICATION AND FINISHING
A. Manufacture each access as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. All joints to be welded.
C. Hardware: Prepare doors to receive cylinder lock. Refer to Section 08710- Door Hardware.
D. Furnish with number of latches required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
E. Finishes:
1. Metal Doors: Bonderized and primed for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate with other trades to provide proper rough opening dimensions and construction for proper installation of access panels.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install draftstop and attic access panels in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install access doors and panels accurately in position.
C. Set frames for proper alignment with draftstop wall or ceiling at attic.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust hardware and door and panels for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 08315
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: [Manual] [and] [electric operated] overhead insulated rolling doors.
B. Related Sections: 1. 05500 Metal Fabrications. Door opening jamb and head members. 2. 06100 Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members. 4. 08700 Hardware. Padlocks. Masterkeyed cylinder. 5. 09910 Painting. Field painting.
C. Products That May Be Supplied, But Are Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Control Station
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: 1. Wind Loading: Supply doors that withstand up to maximum wind load as required by local codes. 2. Cycle Life: a. Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycle per day maximum. 3. Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements: a. Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. b. Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 26 as tested per ASTM E90. c. Minimum R-value of 8.0 (U-factor of 0.125) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. d. Insulation to be CFC Free with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 01330 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items: 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001:2000 registration. b. Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications - see 1.4 below. c. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manual. b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5
SECTION 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2000 registered and a minimum of five years experience in producing doors of the type specified. 2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval.
1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Reference Section 01660 Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.
B. Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Clopay Building Products Co., 8585 Duke Blvd., Mason, OH 45040-3101. Telephone: (800) 282-2260. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ISO 9001:2000 Registered.
B. Model: CESD20
C. Substitutions: Reference Section 01600 Product Substitution Procedures.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Curtain: 1. Slat Material: No. 6F, (Listed Exterior/Interior): a. Galvanized Steel/Galvanized Steel: 24/24 gauge, Grade 40, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating. b. Insulation: 7/8 inch (22 mm) foamed-in-place, closed cell urethane. c. Total Slat Thickness: 15/16 inch (24 mm). d. Slats have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. e. Slat has an R-value of 8.0 and an STC rating of 26. 2. Bottom Bar: Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and exterior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge.
3. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon endlocks on alternate slats each secured with two ¼” (6.35 mm) rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load. Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5
SECTION 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
4. Exterior Slat Finish: a. GalvaNex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, light gray baked-on polyester base coat and a light gray baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish warranty. 5. Curtain Configuration a. RapidResponse configuration with 3’ of extra slats. 6. Bottom Bar Finish: a. Exterior Face: Match slats. b. Interior Face: Mill finish. 7. Bottom Bar Configuration: a. RapidResponse Impactable Bottom Bar consisting of 2 steel angles with flexible connecting members.
B. Guides: Fabricate with minimum 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) structural steel angles. Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar.
Top 16 ½” (419.10 mm) of coil side guide angles to be removable for ease of curtain installation and as needed for future curtain service. 1. Finish: a. Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a light gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. a. RapidResponse Guide Configuration with a 56” removable lower guide section.
C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.
D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. 1. Finish: a. Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a light gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness.
E. Hood: [24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. 1. Finish: a. GalvaNex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding,
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5
SECTION 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
light gray baked-on polyester base coat and a light gray baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish warranty.
F. Weatherstripping: 1. Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Locking: 1. Crank Hoist: Padlockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into slots in guides.
1. Padlockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into slots in guides. Provide interlock switches on motor operated units.
B. Operator and Bracket Mechanism Cover: Provide 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet metal cover to enclose exposed moving operating components at coil area of unit. Finish to match door hood.
2.4 OPERATION
A. Manual Crank Hoist: Provide crank hoist operator including crank gear box, steel crank drive shaft and geared reduction unit. Fabricate gear box to completely enclose operating mechanism and be oil-tight.
1. Control Station: Surface mounted, "Open/Close/Stop" push buttons ; NEMA 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.
C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports.
B. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5
SECTION 08330 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOORS
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative.
B. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5
SECTION 08360 RESIDENTAL GARAGE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section includes upward-acting sectional doors. B. B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal; metal framing and supports. 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware; key cylinders for locks. 3. Section 09900 - Painting; field painting. 4. Section 16100 - Electrical; wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of sectional door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: Installation of sectional doors shall be performed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. D. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Wayne Dalton One Door Drive P.O. Box 67 Mt. Hope, Ohio, 44660
B. Alternate Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corporation, 983 Impression Collection, Vertical Slat.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 RESIDENTAL GARAGE DOORS 08360-2
C. Substitutions: Refer to section 01600 Product Requirements.
2.02 STEEL SECTIONAL DOORS - (Doors scheduled: at attached garages.
A. Trade Reference: Wayne Dalton Model 9800 Fiberglass & Steel Insulated Garage Door, Sonoma 7’ high (8’ at doors where scheduled).
B. Sectional Door Assembly: Fiberglass outer surface bonded to steel door assembly with rabbeted meeting rails to form weathertight joints and provide full-width interlocking structural rigidity. Units shall have the following characteristics:
1. Panel Thickness: 1 5/16” with R-7.6* polyurethane insulation 2. Exterior Surface: Fiberglass Raised Panels stain color as selected by owner. 3. Steel: Minimum 24 gauge, galvanized. 4. Standard Springs: 10,000 cycles. (High cycles, Galvanized)
C. Finish and Color: Fiberglass outer surface with stain color as selected by owner. D. Windload Design: ANSI/DASMA 102 standards and as required by code. E. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. F. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock. (Keyed lock.) G. Weatherstripping: Flexible PVC on bottom section. (Jamb seals.)(Header seals.) H. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. Provide high lift tracks where scheduled. I. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot no more than 1 foot per second. 1. Genie IntelliG 1200 Garage Door opener with 3 button remotes, 2 button wall station, infrared sensors, keyless entry. 2. Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors. 3. Operator Controls: Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons for surface mounting, for interior location. Special Operation: Pull-rope release automatic opening device, vehicle detector operation, radio control operation. 4. Special Operation: Pull-rope release automatic opening device, vehicle operation, radio control operation.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 08560 VINYL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specifications sections, apply to the work of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. The work in this section shall include the furnishing of all vinyl windows as hereinafter specified, or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.3 RELATED WORK:
A. The following sections of this specification should be examined in order to identify materials or equipment which may be obtained through this section.
1. Brick Masonry: Section 04210 2. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 3. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Product Requirements: Section 01600
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work.
1. Provide new factory-glazed, vinyl windows, types as specified herein, installation hardware and all other accessories as required.
2. Treated wood blocking, filters and nailers as required for a secure installation.
3. Fiberglass or foam insulation between window frames and adjacent construction.
4. Sealing of all panning or receptor system joints within each window assembly.
5. Waterproofing and sealing of entire exterior perimeter of window units after installation.
6. Furnishing and delivering of extra materials as specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for vinyl windows, terminology and standards of performance and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA 101/I.S.297and published by AAMA and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA H-R35 (Residential).
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08560-2
B. Window units and glazing to meet local codes for wind load and impact resistance.
C. Performance and Testing: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water resistance tests and applicable load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 101 for type and classification of the window units required in each case.
D. Testing: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by manufacturer showing compliance with such tests.
E. Test reports shall be no more than four years old.
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Provide submittals in compliance with the following:
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and standard details for vinyl window units, including independent laboratory certified test reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including typical unit elevations and showing full or half-scale detail sections of products being supplied and typical installation and waterproofing details. Show anchor locations and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Indicate type of glazing, screening, and window finish being supplied.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store and handle windows, mullions, panels, hardware and all appurtenant items in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protect windows and all accessory materials adequately against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during and after installation.
1.8 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTIES:
A. Manufacturer's Warranties: Submit written warranties from window manufacturer for the following:
1. Windows: Windows furnished shall be certified as fully warranted against any defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from date of project substantial completion.
2. Finish: The pigmented organic finishes on windows and component parts (such as panning, trim, mullions and the like) shall be certified as complying fully with requirements of AAMA 603 for pigmented organic coating and fully warranted against chipping, peeling, cracking and blistering for a period of ten (10) years from date of installation.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08560-3
3. Glass: Glass shall be warranted from visual obstruction due to internal moisture for a period of five (5) years on sealed insulated glass units from date of project substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Manufacture- Subject to compliance with Contract Documents and specifications, provide one of the following:
1. Legacy Vinyl windows: Series: SH vinyl window, Glass – Low-E Argon (with grid) U value = 0.29, SHGC =0.22, VLT = 0.52
2. Window Construction: Provide manufacturers standard construction which has been in use on similar window units for a period of not less than five years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
3. Vinyl window frame color: Dark Bronze.
4. At all second and third floor windows provide fall prevention hardware devices to meet the requirements of the 2015 IBC, Section 1015.8 Window Sills.
5. At least one window at each Bedroom must meet the size requirements of the 2015 IBC, Section 1030 Emergency Escape and Rescue.
B. Alternate Manufactures: Performance values must be equal or better than the base window. Ply Gem 1500 Vinyl Collection 1. Refer to Section 01600 PRODUCT REQUIRMENTS
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Frame and Sash Members: Rigid 100% virgin uPVC extrusions to meet requirements of AAMA 303.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non- corrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units.
C. Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior except where unavoidable for application of hardware.
D. Provide stainless steel Phillips flathead machine screws for exposed fasteners, where required, or special tamperproof fasteners.
E. Locate all fasteners so as not to bridge the thermal break construction of windows.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08560-4
2.3 WINDOW CLASSIFICATION (GRADE):
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide window units complying with requirements of AAMA Classification of H-R35. B. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97, Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.
2.4 WINDOW TYPES: (OPERABLE):
A. General: The following paragraphs define operating arrangements for types of sash (ventilators) required in window units and specify minimum provisions for each type. All upper sash sections are to be fixed. All lower sash sections are to be operable.
B. Fixed vinyl windows or insulated panel frames, no operating hardware or equipment is required.
C. Single Hung vinyl Windows: Units containing one balanced vertically sliding sash, lift handles on lower rail of lower sash.
D. All operable hardware of the windows to adhere to ICC / ANSI A117.1-2003 requirements.
2.5 WINDOW TYPES: (FIXED FRAMES):
A. General.
1. Fixed vinyl windows or insulated panel frames, no operating hardware or equipment is required.
2.6 FABRICATIONS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with specifications indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units prepared completely pre-glazed from factory.
B. Window Members: AJI window members shall be of vinyl. Frames shall have integral installation fins at head, jambs, and sill.
C. Structural Members: To meet the structural requirements of C30:C55, galvanized steel reinforcement shall be employed in all members of the operable sash and aluminum reinforcement shall be used in the fixed meeting rail of the single hung window. For multiple single hung windows to be installed in an opening, specially designed vinyl mullions or common jamb mullions with continuous headers and sills shall be used in the assembly.
1. The master frame shall be no less than 2- in depth.
D. Weather Stripping: Weather stripping shall be capable of meeting the environmental exposure and performance requirements
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08560-5
E. Balances: Balances of appropriate size and capacity to ensure proper operation and to hold operable sash stationary in any open position shall be used. Sash balances shall be easily accessible and replaceable in the field without use of special tools. Balances shall comply with the requirements of AAMA Specification 902.
F. Glazing: All glazing and insulated panels shall be glazed at the factory as follows:
1. Provide safety and tempered glazing at all locations as required by all local, state and national standards and codes. The glazing panels shall be labeled as required by all applicable codes.
2. All units shall be constructed to an overall minimum thickness of 5/8” - manufacturers’ standard insulated glass.
3. All insulated glass units shall be tested certified and carry the respective CBA level certification on the glass spacer.
4. Test reports supporting CBA certification shall be submitted.
G. Both sashes shall be glazed using an architectural glazing tape, and rigid vinyl glazing bead.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window unit, hardware, operators and other components of work. In no case shall attachment to existing structure or to components of the window system be through or bridge the thermal barriers of the windows.
B. Set units plum, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place.
C. Separate aluminum and surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action.
D. Place insulation between frames of new windows and construction to remain, or between frames and new blocking as applicable.
E. Waterproof the entire perimeter of window with waterproof membrane as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.2 CLEAN:
A. Clean vinyl surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to finishes.
B. Clean glass after installation of windows. Remove any excess glazing or sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 6 VINYL WINDOWS 08560-6
C. Initiate all protection and other precautions required to ensure that window units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance.
D. Send to Architect, written recommendations for maintenance and protection of windows following substantial completion of windows.
END OF SECTION 08521
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 6 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Submit Hardware Schedule as follows:
1. Submit complete vertical format Hardware Schedule. Furnish six copies of complete Submittal.
2. Provide manufacturer's name, type, finish, and location for each item. Title page shall indicate Project name and name, address, and phone number of Architect, Owner, and Contractor. Include table of contents, glossary of terms, abbreviations, and symbols used in the Hardware Schedule.
3. Schedule and detail each building type separately. On doors of different sizes or where hinges, closers, or locks are different, use a separate heading. Labeled openings shall not be included with non-labeled openings. Note each Specification hardware set in each schedule heading.
4. Submit Samples as indicated.
a) After approval of Hardware Schedule, furnish templates to other trades who have hardware supplied to their products. All templates shall be clearly marked as to their respective heading number and shall give full information with regard to installation, fasteners, dimensions, and other pertinent details affecting their installation and operation.
C. If requested, supply a Sample of each hardware item required, to be retained by the Architect for comparison with the hardware furnished on the Project. Samples will be returned in time for installation on the Project. Tag Samples for opening identification.
D. Submit Keying Schedule.
E. For fire-rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFPA 80). On panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware."
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: Engage a hardware Supplier who is regularly engaged in the sale and distribution of finish hardware. If Hardware Supplier is not established and known in the area of the Project, he may be required to post a Performance Bond to the Owner.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2
B. Hardware Schedule Writer: Engage a person for scheduling, detailing, ordering, and coordination of hardware who is an experienced hardware consultant. Consultant membership in the Door and Hardware Institute is acceptable as indication of required experience.
C. Provide hardware complying with the following:
1. "Materials and Finishes" BHMA A 156.1 through 31 - 2003. 2. "Specification for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People" ANSI A117.1. 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver hardware to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packages. Each item shall be clearly marked with the opening number and hardware heading to identify correct location
B. Provide a locked storage space complete with shelving for unpacking crates and sorting out hardware. The space shall be maintained clean and dry for the protection of the hardware.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of hardware manufacturer's standard warranty whereby manufacturer agrees to replace or repair hardware units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Date of acceptance of the work for this warranty shall be the date of Substantial Completion of the project.
B. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. McKinney Weatherstrip 2. Kwickset Signature Series 3. McKinney 4. Don-Jo 5. Taymor
2.2 HARDWARE - GENERAL
A. Door Hardware: As indicated in the Schedule at the end of this Section.
B. Non-removable hinge pins for exterior and public interior exposure.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3
C. Dogging feature on non-fire-rated exit devices.
D. All Locksets, latch sets, privacy sets, passage sets, etc. to have lever handles.
2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. All Hardware: BHMA 619 Satin Nickel, or as scheduled.
B. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible and where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer’s standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and texture. Provide finish on exposed cabinet hardware to match that of room door hardware unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new master key system for Project.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster-keys for each grandmaster system.
G. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
H. Properly label keys and deliver to Owner upon completion of final keying.
2.5 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the Project.
2.6 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using manufacturer's product designations.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one or more manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Mount hardware in locations recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Weather stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
A. Units: Install strike-protectors, deadbolts, single-sided deadbolts, and passage sets at all unit entry doors and private balcony patio doors at completion of exterior unit door installation. Install key lock at exterior storage closets and exterior utility closet doors upon completion of exterior door installation.
B. Amenities Area / Leasing Office: Install appropriate key locks on doors
C. Laundry Building: Install appropriate key locks on Laundry Room Doors.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Certain unique hardware items such as thresholds, door stops, weather stripping, sound stripping may not be indicated on this schedule, but may be specified or shown elsewhere in the Contract Documents to be located at particular doors. Coordinate final hardware schedule to show all door hardware required by the Contract Documents, indicating which items are specified as the work of another section.
B. Provide Knox Box brand key lock box at Pool Equipment Building entrance. Exact location as directed by the Fire Marshall.
C. Provide Knox Box brand key lock box at all site gates.
D. Scheduled Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products:
Hardware Sets
Apartment Units
SET #1 - UNIT HARDWARE - ENTRY
Doors: All Unit front entry doors
1 Dead Bolt SGL Cylinder #660 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Door Views 37-B4841SN (ADA Height) 619 TA 1 Door Knocker 37-S4806 619 TA 1 Wall Stop 1508 619 DJ 1 Threshold 142A with Pan - 36” PE (ADA Threshold) Door Bottom Interlocking J Hook - 701S HA 1 Dead Bolt with thumb latch only @ Interior Side #663 619 KW 1 Stainless Steel Kick Plate 8” x 2” less door width 619 KP50
SET #2 - UNIT HARDWARE - INTERIOR PASSAGE
Doors: All Bedroom, Closet, interior storage, pantry, utility & mechanical room doors
1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Wall Stop 1508 619 DJ
SET #3 - UNIT HARDWARE - INTERIOR PRIVACY
Doors: All Bathroom doors
1 Privacy Privacy Katara 619 KW 1 Wall Stop 1508 619 DJ
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6
SET #4 - UNIT HARDWARE - PATIO
Doors: All unit doors to Patio
1 Dead Bolt SGL Cylinder 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Floor Stop FS31 619 MC 1 Threshold MCK2005 AV 36” (72” @BDL.DOORS MW (ADA Threshold) 1 Bolt 4874 619 TR 1 Dead bolt with thumb latch only at interior side #663 619 KW
SET #5 - UNIT HARDWARE - CLOSET
Doors: Interior closet double doors
2 Dummy Levers Katara 619 KW 2 Hinge stops 1502 619 DJ
SET #6 - UNIT HARDWARE - INTERIOR GARAGE
Doors: From Garage
1 Privacy Privacy Katara 619 KW 1 Wall Stop 1508 619 DJ 1 Closer 1601BF 619 NO
SET # 7- Fire Closets
Doors: Fire Closets 3 Hinges T2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 619 MC 1 Dead Bolt Single Cylinder 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Threshold MCK2005AV 36” MW 1 Weather Stripping MCK 305 DR1 x 36” MW 1 Raindrip MCK 346 D x 40” MW 1 Crash Chain CS1152515 US15 Ives
Pool Equipment Building
SET # 9- Exterior Toilet Rooms
Doors: Toilet Rooms 3 Hinges T2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 619 MC 1 Dead Bolt Single Cylinder 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Threshold MCK2005AV 36” MW 1 Weather Stripping MCK 305 DR1 x 36” MW 1 Raindrip MCK 346 D x 40” MW 1 Closer 78 E / F – PA 619 NO
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7
SET #10 – Pool Equipment
Door: Interior Pool Storage
3 Hinges T2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 619 MC 1 Lock Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW
SET #11 – Pool Equipment
Door: Exterior Pool Equipment & Storage
6 Hinges T2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 619 MC 1 Dead Bolt Single Cylinder 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW Surface Mtd. Floor & Head Bolts 619 1 Threshold MCK2005AV 72” MW 1 Weather Stripping MCK 305 DR1 @ perimeter MW 1 Raindrip MCK 346 D x 78” MW 2 Crash Chains CS1152515 US15 Ives
TEAL Building
SET #11 - Exterior Entry Doors
Doors: Entry 3 Hinges T2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 619 MC 1 Dead Bolt Single Cylinder 619 KW 1 Passage Set Passage Set Katara 619 KW 1 Threshold MCK2005AV 36” MW 1 Weather Stripping MCK 305 DR1 x 36” MW 1 Raindrip MCK 346 D x 40” MW 1 Closer 78 E / F – PA 619 NO
Manufacturer List
Code Name DJ Don-Jo PE Pemko HA Hager MC McKinney MW McKinney Weatherstrip NO Norton SA Sargent KW Kwikset Signature Series TA Taymor TR Trimco AA Access Architectural Hardware SC Schlage NG National Guard Products
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 7 of 8 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8
Finish List
Code Description PC Prime Coat 10B Satin Bronze, Oxidized, Relieved, and Oil Rubbed 26D Satin Chrome 626 Satin Chromium Plated 690 Dark Bronze, Painted US10B Dull Bronze, Oxidized and Oil Rubbed US26D Chromium Plated, Dull 619 Satin Nickel 625 Polished Chrome
E. Notes: 1. Provide lock guard plates at all exterior doors that do not have deadbolts. 2. Exterior pre-hung door units to be provide with hinges, thresholds, weather stripping, etc. Refer to Specification Section 08115. 3. Interior pre-hung door units to be provided with hinges. Refer to sections 08211.
END OF SECTION 08710
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 8 of 8 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Date, including material specifications, maintenance recommendations, and published installation recommendations.
B. Submit manufacturer’s certificate verifying quality, grade, thickness and types for glass not bearing labels. Manufacturer shall provide performance criteria for selecting glass thicknesses for each condition.
C. Comply with written instructions of glass product manufacturers; FGMAs “Glazing Manual”; and publications for AAMA, LSGA, and SIGMA as applicable to products indicated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152 for doors and ASTM E 163 for window assemblies; both labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
E. Submit Samples for initial selection: Manufacturer’s samples showing the full range of colors available for each type of glass indicated.
F. Exterior and Interior glass and glazing to comply with local codes for wind and impact resistance. All glazing shall meet the requirements of the 2009 IBC, Safety Glazing, Section 2406.
G. Submit Samples for Verification:
1. Submit two (2) 6-inch samples of each separate type and color of glass specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Libby-Owens-Ford 2. ASG Industries, Inc. 3. Pittsburg Plate Glass 4. CE Glass
2.2 GLASS
A. All glazing shall meet the requirements of the 2012 IBC, Safety Glazing, Section 2406.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 GLAZING 08800-2
B. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), and Quality q3.
1. Provide low-E glass at exterior openings complying with State of Texas Energy Code.
C. Heat-treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated), Type I, Class 1 (clear) and 2 (tinted), Quality Q3, Kind FT (fully tempered), as indicated in Glazing Schedule.
1. Provide low-E glass at exterior openings complying with State of Texas Energy Code.
D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q1 or q2, silver coated per FS-DD-M- 411C, 6.0 mm thick, with edges flat polished.
2.3 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Pavilion Glazing: Sealed Insulating Glass (IG) Vision Glass (vertical)
a. IG units consist of glass lites separated by a dehydrated airspace that is hermetically dual sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB), or thermo plastic spacer (TPS) and a secondary seal of silicone or an organic sealant depending on the application.
b. Insulating glass units are certified through the insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) to ASTM E2190.
c. All glazing shall be tempered and meet the requirements of the 2009 IBC, Safety Glazing, Section 2406.
d. IG Vision Unit performance characterisitics. a. Exterior Lite: ¼” PPG Clear b. Interior Lite: ¼” PPG Solarban 60 on Clear Low-E #3 c. ½” Cavity d. Performance Characteristics: Winter U-factor / U-value: 0.29 Visible Light Transmittance: 70% Summer U-factor / U-value: 0.27 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 Shading Coefficient 0.44 Total Solar Transmittance: 17% Light to Solar Gain: 1.85 Ultraviolet Transmittance: 19%
B. Glass at Pool Equipment: Interior Doors and Side Lights, tempered. Exterior Operable and Fixed Windows, Exterior Glass Doors – Clear, tempered and insulated, LOW-E glass; Color: As Selected by Architect.
C. Glass at Living Units: - Exterior Operable & Fixed Windows; LOW-E insulated glass; color as selected by architect. Tempered where required by code. Door glazing shall be LOW-E insulated glass; tempered & color as selected by architect.
D. Mirrors at Clubhouse & Leasing Office: - ¼” thick plate mirror with single image. Cut smooth with polished edges.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 GLAZING 08800-3
E. Framed Mirrors at Living Units – 3/16” thick “A” quality plate glass, smooth cut and polished edges. Framed mirror as selected by owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Field measure after cabinet installation and cut mirrors to fit each location.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in FGMA’s “Glazing Manual”
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation.
C. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
E. All tempered glass shall have manufacturers labels located in the bottom right hand corner of all door and window.
F. Install all mirrors with four (4) demountable clips, brushed aluminum “J” hooks. No adhesive of any type shall be used.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08800
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Refer to all drawings and other sections of this specification to determine the type and extent of work therein affecting the work of this section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned herein. B. System Description: Composite wall system consisting of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/ STUCCOBASE™ Premix and SENERGY Finish Coat. C. Senergy products are listed in this specification to establish a standard of quality. Any substitutions to this specification shall be submitted to and receive approval from the Architect at least 10 days before bidding. Proof of equality shall be borne by the submitter. D. The system type shall be Senergy Stucco Wall System as manufactured by BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC. – Wall Systems, Jacksonville, Florida (hereinafter referred to as “BASF Wall Systems”).
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03000 Concrete substrate B. Section 04000 Masonry substrate C. Section 06100 Wood framing D. Section 06160 Sheathing E. Section 07270 Air barriers F. Section 07620 Sheet metal flashing and trim G. Section 07650 Flexible flashing H. Section 07900 Joint protection I. Section 08000 Openings J. Section 09220 Supports for plaster and gypsum board K. Section 09250 Gypsum board
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C150-99a Standard Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM C926-98a Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster C. ASTM C1063-99 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster D. ASTM C847-95 Standard Specification for Metal Lath. E. ASTM C933-96a Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath. F. ASTM C1032-96 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base G. ICC-ES AC11 Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings H. ESR-1064 ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., ES Report™
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on Senergy Stucco Wall System materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and durability. C. Code Compliance: Provide manufacturer’s applicable code compliance report.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-2
D. Samples: Submit two 12 x 12 inch size samples and on site built mock-up of Senergy Stucco Wall System design illustrating Finish Coat color and texture range for owner and architect approval. An approved sample shall be available and maintained at the job site. E. Certificate: System manufacturer’s approval of applicator. F. Sealant: Sealant manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with ASTM C1382. G. System manufacturer’s typical details, system design guide and related product literature which indicate preparation required, storage, installation techniques, jointing requirements and finishing techniques. An approved sample shall be available and maintained at the job site. H. Shop drawings: The applicator shall prepare and submit schedules and complete shop drawings to the Architect for approval. The drawings shall show all details, sizes, types, finishes, anchorage and sealant joints and other items as required or specified so that a proper evaluation can be made of the proposed materials and construction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: More than 10 years in the insulated exterior wall systems industry, with more than 1000 completed cement plaster stucco projects.
B. Applicator: Approved by the Wall Systems division of BASF Corporation (herein referred to as “BASF Wall Systems”) in performing work of this section.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements.
D. Field Samples 1. Provide under provisions of Section 01400 and 01600. 2. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture, 4 x 6 feet in size of system materials illustrating method of attachment, surface Finish color and texture. 3. Prepare each sample panel using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application. 4. Locate sample panel where directed. 5. Accepted sample panel may not remain as part of the work.
E. Design and Detailing a Stucco Wall System:
1. General a. The system shall be installed in strict accordance with current recommended published details and product specifications from the system’s manufacturer. b. Sealants and backer rod as required at dissimilar materials and expansion joints within the Stucco Wall System shall provide a complete watertight system. c. The use of dark colors must be considered in relation to wall surface temperature as a function of local climate conditions. d. Minimum slope for all EPS shapes/trim bands shall be 1:2 with a maximum length of 30.5 cm (12") [e.g. 15 cm in 30.5cm (6" in 12")], unless
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3
other manufacturer-approved detailing is shown on the construction documents.
2. Substrate Systems a. Deflection of the substrate systems shall not exceed L/360. b. Acceptable substrates are PermaBase Cement-Board and other cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A-exterior) , poured concrete/unit masonry, Fiberock Aqua-Tough Sheathing, ZIP System, Dens- Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177), gypsum sheathing (ASTM C1396), ZIP System sheathing, Exposure I or exterior plywood (Grade C-D or better), or Exposure I OSB. c. Application over substrates of poured concrete/unit masonry to a maximum thickness of 5/8” may be installed without the use of metal lath in accordance with ASTM C-926. d. Other substrates shall be approved by the system’s manufacturer in writing prior to the application. e. The applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to the Stucco Wall System installation. f. The substrate systems shall be engineered with regard to structural performance by others. 3. System Joints a. Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion joints, at prefabricated panel joints, where substrates change and where structural movement is anticipated. Control joints are recommended at a minimum of every 144 ft2 of wall surface area and where specified by the design professional. The maximum uncontrolled length or width is 18 lineal feet and a maximum uncontrolled length to ratio of 2 1/2: 1. b. Reference construction documents for specific locations. 4. Coordination with Other Trades a. Architect shall evaluate adjacent materials such as windows, doors, etc. for conformance to manufacturer’s details. b. Adjacent trades shall provide scaled shop drawings for review.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to the job site all materials in unopened, undamaged containers, clearly marked and identified with the system manufacturer’s name and description of contents. B. Store materials inside, or under cover and off the ground and keep them dry, protected from the weather, direct sun light, surface contamination, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic and other causes. C. Stack insulation board flat, a minimum of 30.5 cm (12") above the ground, and protected from the sun. D. Store pail materials in temperatures not less than 4oC (40oF) or more than 43oC (110oF).
1.07 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements The contractor under this section shall verify site conditions to assure that the requirements of storage of materials and installation procedures conform to the system manufacturer’s current
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-4
product storage and application requirements as applicable to warranty conditions.
B. Protection of Work 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during the application of the system. 2. The system shall be protected when work ceases for the day or when an area is completed so that water will not infiltrate behind the system.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and schedule installation of Stucco Wall System with related work of other sections. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the system. C. Coordinate and schedule installation of windows, doors, A/C units, air seals etc.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide a Senergy five-year materials warranty for Senergy Stucco Wall System installations. B. Comply with BASF Wall Systems notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
All components of the Senergy Stucco Wall System shall be obtained from the system manufacturer or through an authorized distributor.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stucco Wall System: 3/4" thick stucco - Expanded Metal Lath: The lath shall comply with ASTM C847-93. Furring and self-furring requirements shall be as set forth for wire-fabric lath. Minimum weight is 1.36 kg/m2 (2.5 lb/yd2.) Other acceptable welded laths shall comply with ASTM C933-80 and other acceptable woven laths shall comply with ASTM C1032-86.
B. Plaster Sand: Must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts and organic matter.
Sampling and testing must comply with ASTM C897. Plaster sand must be graded within the following limits: Percent retained by weight Retained on ± 2 Percent U.S. Standard Sieve Min. Max. No. 4 - 0 No. 8 0 10 No. 16 10 40 No. 30 30 65 No. 50 70 90 No. 100 95 100
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-5
E. Water: clean and potable without foreign matter.
F. SENERGY STUCCOBASE™
1. SENERGY STUCCOBASE™: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, and proprietary ingredients; supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats. -OR- 2. SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ Premix: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, sand, and proprietary ingredients; supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats.
G. SENERGY SENERLASTIC Finish, 100% acrylic polymer based elastomeric finish; air cured, compatible with Base Coat, (provide sample of each finish - CLASSIC, FINE, TEXTURE, COURSE & SAHARA and color for owner & architect approval). Color as selected.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier: A secondary weather barrier must be installed over sheathed substrates and wrapped into rough openings prior to installation of the Senergy Stucco Wall System. (Not required on unit masonry/non-insulated concrete substrates surfaces to receive the Senergy Stucco Wall System). Coordinate secondary moisture protection with the recommendations of the ZIP System manufacturer. Ensure compatibility of the systems.
1. Acceptable Secondary Moisture Protection Barriers include polymeric weather resistive barriers such as Tyvek® StuccoWrap and acceptable equals that comply with and are recognized by local building codes. Grade D 60 minute paper and other code approved asphalt saturated building papers are also acceptable. Senergy trowel/ roller applied weather barriers (SENERSHIELD or SENERSHIELD-R) can be used provided a subsequent layer of a polymeric weather resistive barrier such as Tyvek Stuccowrap or equal is applied over the SENERSHIELD or SENERSHIELD-R. 2. Install the Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier over the substrate and according to manufacturer’s specifications and applicable building code requirements. 3. The Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier shall be free of any damage such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the SENERGY STUCCOBASE™. 4. Wrap the Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier into rough openings (doors, windows, etc.) in accordance with Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System Bulletin #1025649 to increase the level of moisture protection to the building frame and interior. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to assure proper sequencing, detailing and installation of materials.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-6
B. Trim: Casing bead, corner bead, expansion joint and weep screed accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1063. Accessories shall be: galvanized, meeting ASTM A525 and ASTM A526. Refer to Senergy’s Accepted Stucco Wall Systems Lath and Trim Accessories Bulletin #1025659 for additional information.
1. Foundation weep screed: Beveled edge designed to terminate finish system and drain internal moisture. 2. Provide casing bead with weep screed at ALL horizontal terminations. 3. Casing bead: Square edge style. 4. Corner bead: Small radius nose style. 5. Control joints: W-shaped accordion profile style. Spacing shall be 15’-0” O.C. maximum in either direction. 6. Expansion joints: Two piece type slip-joint design or pair of casing beads spaced for application of sealant bead.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Walls 1. Substrates a. Acceptable substrates: PermaBase Cement-Board and other cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A-exterior) , poured concrete/unit masonry, Fiberock Aqua-Tough Sheathing, Dens-Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177), gypsum sheathing (ASTM C1396), Exposure I or exterior plywood, or Exposure I OSB. ZIP System Sheathing. Consult BASF Wall Systems Technical Service Department for all other applications. b. Wall sheathings must be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements and manufacturers recommendations. c. Verify concrete/unit masonry is free of dust, dirt, grease, oils, laitance, efflorescence, biological residue, existing paint or coatings, curing compounds, form release agents, or any other contaminants which might affect the bond of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™. Masonry walls should be properly cured to full load bearing capacity, laid true, and with joints tooled. Properly prepared concrete will have an open texture similar to fine grit sandpaper. d. Examine surfaces to receive system and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry, clean, and sound. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities greater than 6 mm in 3 m (1/4" in 10'). 2. Flashings a. Heads, jambs and sills of all openings must be flashed with a minimum 230 mm (9") strip of secondary moisture barrier prior to window/door, HVAC, etc. installation. b. Windows and openings shall be flashed according to design and building code requirements.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-7
c. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head flashing and/or the joints between the units must be fully sealed. 3. Utilities The system must be properly terminated (back-wrapped, sealed, flashed) at all lighting fixtures, electrical outlets, hose bibs, dryer vents, etc. Refer to Senergy Stucco Wall System Typical Details. 4. Decks Wood decks must be properly flashed prior to system application. For proper application, refer to Senergy Stucco Wall System with PermaLath™ Reinforcement Typical Details. The system must be terminated a minimum of 25 mm (1") above all decks, patios, sidewalks, etc. 5. Secondary moisture barrier Verify that the secondary moisture barrier is installed over the substrate per applicable building code requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System prior to application of the Senergy Stucco Wall System. 6. Roof Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA). 7. Kick-out flashing Kick-out flashing must be installed where required. The kick-out flashing must be leak-proof and angled (min 100o) to allow for proper drainage and water diversion. Refer to Senergy Stucco Wall System Reinforcement Typical Details.
C. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the general contractor and/or builder and/or architect and/or owner. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 MIXING
General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use.
A. Senergy base coat: SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ 1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. 2. Add 18.9–22.7 liters (5–6 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer per one bag of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™. 3. Add one bag of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™. 4. Add one half 45.4–54.4 kg (100–120 lbs) of the required plaster sand (ASTM C144 or ASTM C897). 5. Mix for 3–4 minutes at normal mixing speed while adding the remainder 45.4–54.4 kg (100–120 lbs) of the plaster sand. Allow material to set for 2–4 minutes, and then remix adding water to achieve desired consistency. Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 7 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-8
B. Senergy base coat: SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX 1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. 2. Add 7.6–9.5 liters (2–2.5 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer. 3. Slowly add one bag of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX. 4. Mix for one minute at normal mixing speed. Allow material to set for 2–4 minutes with mixing blades at rest. Then re-mix, adding water to achieve desired consistency. Desired consistency varies with type of application (trowel or gun), Substrate (paper- backed lath or block) and whether the stucco is applied to a wall or a ceiling. Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment.
C. Senergy Base Coat/Adhesive 1. ALPHA BASE COAT a. Mix base coat with a paddle and drill until thoroughly blended, before adding Portland cement. b. Mix one part (by weight) Portland cement with one part base coat. Add Portland cement in small increments, thoroughly mixing to a homogeneous consistency after each additional increment. c. Clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability.
2. ALPHA DRY BASE COAT a. Mix and prepare each bag in a 19-liter (5-gallon) pail. b. Fill the container with approximately 5.6-liters (1.5-gallons) of clean, potable water. c. Add ALPHA DRY BASE COAT in small increments, mixing after each additional increment. d. Mix ALPHA DRY BASE COAT and water with a mixer to a homogeneous consistency. e. Additional ALPHA DRY BASE COAT or water may be added to adjust workability.
D. Senergy SENERLASTIC 1. Thoroughly mix the factory-prepared material with a clean paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. 2. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. 3. Additives are not permitted. 4. Close container when not in use. 5. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use.
3.03 APPLICATION
General: Apply Senergy Stucco Wall System materials in accordance with Specifications.
A. Apply STUCCOBOND substrate bonding agent as per Specifications to areas that will receive StuccoBase mixture with in 12 hours. B. Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier (Not required on unit masonry/non-insulated concrete substrates surfaces to receive the SENERGY STUCCOBASE™). 1. Install according to the Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier manufacturer’s specifications and applicable building code requirements.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 8 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-9
2. The Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier shall be free of any damage such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the Senergy Stucco Wall System. 3. Wrap the Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier into rough openings (doors, windows, etc.) in accordance with Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System Bulletin #1025649 to increase the level of moisture protection to the building frame and interior. 4. Coordinate work with other trades to assure proper sequencing, detailing and installation of materials. 5. Expanded polystyrene insulation board (Trim Board) The expanded polystyrene insulation board (size as detailed, nominal 1.5 PCF density) shall be placed as detailed and anchored according to manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Trim junction 1. When two pieces of trim abut: a. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4") bed of acceptable trim sealant. Stucco Wall System b. Allow 3–5 mm (1/8"–3/16") gap between the abutting trim pieces. Do not overlap trim. c. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. True expansion joints must be fastened to the structural substrate. 2. When two or more pieces of trim intersect: a. The vertical trim piece shall be continuous with all horizontal pieces. b. Miter all corners at intersections of trim. c. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4") bed of acceptable trim sealant. d. Allow 3–5 mm (1/8"–3/16") gap between the intersecting trim pieces. Do not overlap the trim. e. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications. NOTE: Control joints are recommended at a minimum of every 13.4 m2 (144 ft2) and as specified by the design professional. The maximum uncontrolled length or width is 5.5 lineal meters (18 lineal feet) and a maximum uncontrolled length to width ratio of 2 1/2:1. It is the sole responsibility of the project design team, including the architect, engineer, etc., to ultimately determine specific expansion and control joint placement, width and design. 3. Application over open framing: a. The weather-resistive membrane is placed over open wood or steel framing spaced a maximum of 610 mm (24") on center. Wall bracing, in accordance with the applicable code, shall be installed. Square wall corners and parapet corners, metal corner reinforcement are optional. The expanded polystyrene insulation board [610 mm x 2438 mm (2' x 8') tongue-and-groove] shall be placed horizontally with the tongue facing upward and temporarily held in place with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Self- tapping screws shall be used to temporarily fasten the board to metal framing. Vertical butt joints shall be staggered a minimum of one framing space from the adjacent courses and occur directly over framing. b. The lath shall be applied tightly over the insulation board and shall be fastened through the board to wood framing with minimum 50 mm long (2"), No. 11 gauge [3.75 mm (0.148") shaft diameter, 11.1 mm (0.438") head diameter], galvanized roofing nails or No. 16 gauge [1.59 mm (0.0625") shaft diameter] galvanized staples spaced a maximum of 152.4 mm (6") on center with a minimum 25.4 mm (1") penetration into the wood framing. Staples shall have a minimum 13 mm (1/2") crown width. Stapling shall be utilized only in wood species having a minimum specific gravity of 0.42. The lath shall be fastened to all steel framing members [minimum No. 20 gauge, 0.912 mm
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 9 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-10
(0.0359") thick] using No. 8-18, S-12, pan-head, self-tapping screws spaced a maximum of 15 cm (6") on center to all framing. The screws shall penetrate framing at least 6.35 mm (1/4"). The wire lath shall be applied with minimum 25.4 mm (1") end laps.
D. Lath:
Expanded Metal lath 1. The metal lath shall be applied with minimum 13 mm (1/2") side laps and 25 mm (1") end laps. 2. When end laps occur between supports, lace or wire ties the ends of the sheets with 1.2 mm (0.0475") galvanized annealed steel wire. 3. Refer to ASTM C1063 for additional information. 4. Corrosion-resistant fasteners for lath attachment shall penetrate a minimum of 25 mm (1") into wood framing. 5. Apply the Senergy Stucco Wall System over steel framing [minimum No. 20 gauge, 0.912 mm (0.0359") thick].Lath is secured to framing using No.8-18, S-12, pan-head, self-tapping screws spaced a maximum of 152.4 mm (6 inches) vertical on center to studs.
E. SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX Base Coat: Stucco Wall System Application – 3/4" thickness. 1. Following surface preparation and installation of the lath and accessories apply the SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX mixture to the approved substrate by hand toweling or machine spraying to a thickness to 1/2", completely embedding the lath. 2. Use rod and darby to level the applied base coat without exposing the lath. 3. After initial set begins and surface has sufficiently hardened, use sponge or hard rubber float as required to fill voids, holes or imperfections, leaving the surface ready to receive Senergy Finish. 4. At subcontractor’s option, the double back method of application, whereby the first and second coats are applied and cured as one system, may be used. If this system is used, the second coat (brown) should be applied as soon as the first coat is rigid. 5. Damp cure for at least 48 hours by lightly and evenly fogging the surface with water at least twice a day. Direct sunlight, hot temperatures, low humidity and windy conditions may make additional fogging necessary. 6. Allow SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX to cure a minimum of days prior to application of EPS insulation board shapes or primer and Finish Coat application.
G. Senergy Finish Coat 1. SENERLASTIC ® FINISH: (provide sample of each finish - CLASSIC, FINE, TEXTURE, COARSE & SAHARA and color for owner & architect approval). a. Apply Finish directly to the stucco brown coat with a clean, stainless steel trowel.
NOTE: 1. Certain colors may require the use of Senergy STUCCO PRIME over stucco brown coat prior to application of Finish.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 10 of 11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-11
2. In order to minimize the possibility of base coat read-through with color #330 Ultra- White in CLASSIC, we recommend the use of STUCCO PRIME. Base Coat read- through with CLASSIC Finish in Ultra-White is very applicator dependent. A color sample must be approved prior to product shipment. Also, slight color or texture variations may occur. Over time, and depending on its exposure. b. Apply and level Finish during the same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. c. Maintain a wet edge on Finish by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface. d. Work Finish to corners, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area. e. Float Finish to achieve final texture.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01710. B. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove excess material, droppings, and debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect base coat from rain, snow and frost for 48–72 hours following application.
END OF SECTION 09220
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 11 of 11 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED ELSEWHERE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections apply to this section.
1.2 RELATED TECHNICAL ITEMS:
A. Rough carpentry: Section 06100 B. Painting: Section
1.3 STANDARD
A. All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' current directions. The products listed in this section are by United States Gypsum Co. They are used as a minimum standard in this section. Other manufacturer products shown to be equal will be considered for acceptance.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. Store all panels flat.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. In cold weather and during gypsum panel application and joint finishing, temperatures within the building shall be maintained within the range of 55 degrees F. (13 degrees) to 90 degrees F. (21 degrees C.) Adequate ventilation shall be provided to carry off excess moisture.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and test reports, in compliance with Section 01300- 'Submittals."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Interior Panels:
1. Gypsum Panels – Walls - (in length as long as practical to minimize number of joints): SHEETROCK brand FIRECODE Core Type X, Gypsum Panels, 5/8" thick. SHEETROCK brand Water-Resistant FIRECODE Core Type X, Gypsum Panels 5/8" thick (use in all Laundry Rooms, Bath Rooms tub and shower surrounds).
2. Gypsum Panels – Ceilings - (in length as long as practical to minimize number of joints): SHEETROCK brand FIRECODE Core Type C, Gypsum Panels, 5/8" thick.
3. GYPSUM TILE BACKING PANELS
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2
a. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board with Water-Resistant Coating: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. (Use at ALL tub surrounds and wet areas with tile finish).
i. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide G-P Gypsum Corporation; "DensShield Fireguard Tile Backer" or a comparable product by another manufacturer. ii. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. iii. Long Edges: Square.
b. Schluter Systems, KERDI-BAND at all tub and shower enclosure corners (10” wide) at all corners and joints between tile and tub.
B. Exterior Panels:
1. Gypsum Sheathing: (SHEETROCK brand Gypsum Sheathing, FIRECODE core Type X, 5/8” thick at 1 hour fire rated exterior walls.. 2. Exterior Ceiling (Soffit) Board: GP DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing Exterior Ceiling Board 5/8" thick - FIRECODE Core Type X. 3. QuietBrace Brand Sheathing (½”) by Temple-Inland (refer to Structural Drawings).
C. Furring Accessories: Resilient Channels: RC-1 Resilient Channel or equivalent. See Rated Assemblies for locations. Space at 16” O.C. vertical.
D. Fasteners: 1. Drywall Screws: self-drilling-Type S-12. Size and head type as recommended for application.
E. Insulation: see SECTIONS 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
F. Trim Accessories:
1. Corner Angles: Metal Angles, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 24-ga. corrosion-resistant steel, and lengths as required.
2. Metal Trim: 'L-Mold' and 'J-Mold' where required.
G. FINISHING PRODUCTS:
1. Joint Treatment: SHEETROCK Fiberglass Drywall Tape (must use a setting-type joint compound for first coat over tape). SHEETROCK Joint Compound, Topping, All Purpose.
H. FINISH SURFACE:
1. Light Orange Peel Texture - same on interior walls and ceilings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3
3.1 GYPSUM PANEL APPLICATION:
A. Provide Gypsum Association standard GA214-96, finish level 3.
B. Basic Single-Layer System, Treated Joints (at fire rated walls and ceilings; all taping and joint treatment shall be applied as per manufacturers recommendations to maintain the fire rating).
C. Position all ends and edges of all gypsum panels over framing members, except when joints are at right angles to framing members as in perpendicular application or when end joints are back blocked. Apply gypsum panels first to the ceiling and then to the walls. Extend ceiling board into corners and make firm contact with top plate. To minimize end joints, use panels of maximum practical lengths. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive courses with joints on opposite sides of a partition placed on different studs.
D. Attach panels to framing supports by Power-driven Screws. Space fasteners not less than 3/8, from edges and ends of panels and drive as recommended for specified fastening method. Drive fasteners in field of panels first, working toward ends and edges. Hold panel in firm contact with framing while driving fastener heads slightly below surface of gypsum panels in a uniform dimple without breaking face paper.
E. Cut ends, edges, scribe or make cutouts within field of panels in a workmanlike manner. Gypsum board should be cut to size utilizing a knife and a straight edge. A power saw should be used only of it is equipped with a dust collection device.
F. Install trim at all internal and external angles formed by the intersection of either panel surfaces or other surfaces. Apply corner bead to all vertical or horizontal external corners in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
G. SHEETROCK brand Gypsum Panels, Water-Resistant-(see manufacturer’s instructions for installation.)
H. GYPSUM SHEATHING (Type X) FASTEN APPLICATION:
1. Gypsum Sheathing shall be a part of the exterior fire rated walls (Shearwalls: refer to structural drawings). Attach perpendicular to framing. Horizontal edges shall be blocked (Horizontal Metal Framing). All sheathing boards shall be screw attached at 6" on center at all vertical and horizontal framing.
2. When gypsum sheathing is to be in place for more than four (4) months prior to covering, all gaps resulting form cuts, corners, joints and machine end cuts of the sheathing shall be filled with exterior caulk at time of erection or wrapped with No. 15 asphalt felt within 15 days of sheathing installation.
3. Gaps and holes in sheathing shall be filled with an approved sealant material prior to covering with brick or siding.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4
I. JOINT TREATMENT APPLICATION:
1. SHEETROCK Joint Tape- Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply joint compound in a thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Immediately apply SHEETROCK Joint Tape centered over joint and seated into compound. Sufficient compound-approx. 1/64" to l/32"-must remain under the tape to provide proper bond. Follow immediately with a thin skim coat to embed tape, but not to function as a second coat. Fold and embed tape properly in all interior angles to provide a true angle. The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat.
2. Apply second coat of joint compound over embedding coat, filling panel taper flush with surface; cover tape and feather out at least 2” beyond first coat. On joints with no taper, cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on either side of tape. Allow second coat to dry thoroughly prior to application of finish coat.
3. Spread finish coat evenly over and extend at least 2” beyond second coat on all joints and feather to a smooth uniform finish. Do not allow finished joint to protrude beyond plane of the surface. Where necessary, sand lightly between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface ready for decoration. When sanding take care not to roughen face paper.
J. SHEETROCK Fiberglass Drywall Tape:
1. Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Center and apply SHEETROCK Fiberglass Drywall Tape directly over joint, pressing tape firmly so that it adheres evenly to surface. To eliminate wrinkles and ensure maximum bond, press entire length of tape with drywall knife. Avoid overlapping tape at intersections. Cut tape with drywall knife. Cover with a layer of SHEETROCK Setting-Type (DURABOND) or Lightweight Setting-Type (EASYSAND) Joint Compound, forcing compound through the tape with a drywall knife/trowel to completely fill and level the joint. Failure to completely fill the joint may result in cracking. Let dry and sand lightly as required. Apply second coat of SHEETROCK Setting-Type (DURABOND) feathering approximately 2" beyond first coat. Let dry and sand lightly as required.
K. FINISHING FASTENERS:
1. Apply a setting-type, or all-purpose or lightweight all-purpose compound to fastener depressions as the first coat. Follow with a minimum of two additional coats of topping or all-purpose compound, leaving all depressions level with the surface.
L. FINISHING BEADS AND TRIMS:
1. SHEETROCK Paper Faced Metal Drywall Bead and Trim: Apply compound to both sides of corner, extending 2” on each side for outer corners, 1-1/2" for inside corners. Cut bead to desired length; align tight to ceiling and press firmly with fingers along length of corner to set. Do not bend bead. Run taping knife over comer at a 45d angle with even pressure. Remove excess compound using knife to eliminate air bubbles under paper. Allow to dry. For outer corners, apply another coat of compound to both sides, feathering out 5”-6” on each side. Let dry; sand lightly as necessary. For inner corners, apply fill coat to one side,
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5
feathering out 1-1/2”. Let dry. Apply fill coat to other side using same procedure. Let dry. Sand lightly where necessary
2. For outer comer, apply finishing coat, feathering 8" from nose of bead. Draw knife along one side. Let dry. Sand and prime. For inner corners, apply finishing coat to one side, feathering 1 " past previous coat. Let dry. Apply finishing coat to other side. Let dry. Sand and prime.
3. Other Bead and Trim- Apply first coat to all bead and trim and property feather out from ground to plane of surface. Compound must thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. Apply second coat in same manner as first coat, extending compound slightly beyond face of panel. Compound must be thoroughly dry prior to application of finish coat.
4. Apply finish coat to all bead and trim, extending compound slightly beyond the second coat and properly feathering from ground to plane or surface. When dry, sand finish as necessary to provide a flat smooth surface for decoration. When sanding take care not to roughen face paper.
M. EXTERIOR JOINT SYSTEM APPLICATION (soffit and ceiling only)
1. Mix ToughRock 90 Setting-Type Joint Compound according to directions on the bag. Do not over mix or use in temperatures below 45'F. Pre-fill joints of GP brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board with ToughRock 90 Setting-Type Compound. After pre-fill has hardened, embed 2” wide joint tape centered over joint. When compound has hardened, immediately apply fill coat. Apply ToughRock 90 Setting-Type Joint Compound over flanges of Zinc Control Joints, metal beads and trim. Spot fastener heads. After fill coat has hardened, apply finishing coat of ToughRock 90 Setting-Type Joint Compound. Once dry, apply a skim coat of ToughRock 90 Setting compound over the panels to achieve a uniform Santa Fe finish over the entire area. Completely cover all joints, angles, beads, control joints and fasteners.
2. Provide control joints at 20’-0” O.C. maximum spacing.
3. NOTE: After ToughRock 90 Setting-Type has dried, apply one coat oil-based primer-sealer and one coat exterior oil or latex paint over entire surface.
N. SUSPENDED FURRING SYSTEM
1. Attach the system to the building structure in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.
O. TEXTURE FINISHES:
1. Textured finishes must be mixed and applied to the drywall in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION 09250
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 09310 TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
1. Submit Product Data and material Samples. 2. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated. 3. Submit Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of roofing tile specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 4. Certificates: submit manufacturer's Master Grade Certificate signed by both tile manufacturer and tile installer. 5. Samples: submit samples of the following for approval and selection by Architect: 1. Panels, twelve (12") inches square, of each type, color and pattern of tile required. 2. Grout manufacturer's full color range samples. 3. Each type of trim shape and special shape required. 6. For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with static coefficients of friction of minimum 0.6 for level surfaces and step treads, and of minimum 0. 8 for ramp surfaces, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Ceramic Tile shall be standard grade and comply with requirements of ANSI A137.1 with modifications as specified herein.
1.4 CONFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (current edition) ANSI A137.1 “'Ceramic Tile”. ANSI A108.1 “Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar". ANSI A108.5 "Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar'. ANSI 108.4 "Ceramic Tile installed with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives".
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (Current Edition)
ASTM C 501 "Standard Test for Relative Resistance to Wear Off Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser". ASTM C 484 "Standard Test for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 TILE 09310-2
A. Deliver extra materials to owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Tile Products: a) American Olean Tile Company. b) Dal-Tile Corporation. c) Interceramics, USA. d) Refer to Interior Designer Room Finish Schedule.
2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting materials:
a) American Olean Tile Company. b) Boiardi Products Corporation. c) Bostik. d) C-Cure Corporation. e) Dal-Tile Corporation. f) DAP, Inc. g) Laticrete International, Inc. h) Mapei Corporation. i) Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j) Summitville Tiles, Inc. k) TEC Incorporated.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic tile that complies with Standard Grade requirements of ANSI A137.1,"Specifications for Ceramic Tile”.
UNITS:
Tile 1: Tub Surround: 3” x 6” Bright glazed, ceramic tile cushion edge. Tile perimeter size: 6” x 2” bullnose at edges. Refer to Material Finishes schedule on drawings. Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard products and trim accessories for selection by Architect / Owner. Accessories: One (1) soap dish and 24” towel bar per tub.
Tile 2: Floor tile at Bath Rooms: 13” x 13” Bright glazed, porcelain tile cushion edge. Refer to Material Finishes schedule on drawings.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 TILE 09310-3
Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard products and trim accessories for selection by Architect / Owner.
Tile 3: Kitchen Backsplash: 2" x 4" porcelain brick tile mosaic. Refer to Material Finishes schedule on drawings. Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard products and trim accessories for selection by Architect / Owner.
CLUBHOUSE:
Floor, Base and Wall Tile: Refer to the Finish Schedule on sheet A-2.15A & A-2.16A.
2.3 TRIM AND SPECIAL SHAPES
A. Bases: cove base units; width and height to match wall tile. B. Trim: surface-mounted bullnose unit; width and height to match wall tile. C. External corners: bullnose shapes with round out base and top trim special shape. D. Internal corners: field-butted square with square in corner base and top trim special shapes.
2.4 TILE-SETTING AND -GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Materials complying with ANSI standards. B. Thin-Set Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials complying with the following: 1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, Proprietary pre blended compound of portland cement, selected and graded aggregates, color pigments and chemical additives gaged with latex additive to comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. Color to be selected by Architect from standards in the industry (any manufacturer). D. Use latex additive in grout which is compatible with latex additive in latex-portland cement mortar. E. Sealants: Refer to Section 07920 for requirements. F. Schluter-KERDI-BAND (10” wide) at all corners and joints between tile and tub.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting-bed accessories complying with ANSI A108.lA and as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.
B. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 TILE 09310-4
C. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, provide cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. Apply Schluter Systems, KERDI-BAND at all tub and shower enclosure corners.
D. Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size.
E. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
F. Secure tile firmly in place with joints well filled and lines straight and true. Bring finished surfaces to true and level planes. Completed work shall be completely free of cracked or broken tiles. Remove and replace all hollow sounding tiles which are void of supporting mortar.
G. Where borders, lines, patterns, panels or other effects are a part of the work, properly space tiles and accurately reproduced required designs.
H. Provide manufacturers recommended expansion or control joints in all, tile work, at room perimeter or at joints in floor substrates.
I. Form intersections and returns perfectly. Perform cutting and drilling of tile neatly without marring tile face. Carefully grind and joint cut edges of tile against any trim, finish and built-in fixtures and fittings so that usual plates, collars or covering will overlap tile.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE
A. Set, grout and finally clean ceramic wall tile in strict accord with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.5
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GROUT
A. Use commercial cement grout for grouting floor tile. B. Use dry-set grout for grouting ceramic wall tile. C. Force grout into joints to fill solid. Remove and re-grout discolored joints. Fill all skips and gaps in joint grout. D. Provide caulking at perimeter edges and inside corners of tile work. Refer to Section 07920 Joint Sealants.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Finished installation shall be trued to a tolerance of within any undivided space and 1/16” (+/-) within any running foot.
3.6 CLEAN UP A. Remove excess grout from face of tile, fixtures and floor areas during tile setting and subsequent to the completion work. END OF SECTION 09310
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 09651 VINYL FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data and color Samples.
B. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Submit Samples for Verification: Full-size tile of each different color and pattern of vinyl plank specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1.3 PREPARATION
A. Installation shall be done by skilled craftsmen using adhesives recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
B. Vinyl Plank Flooring: Deliver to owner at least 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type and color of vinyl plank installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL PLANK
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products:
1. Shaw 2. Earthwerks. 3. Armstrong. 4. Congoleum. 5. Mannington.
B. Color: Provide manufacturer’s standard colors for Architect’s and Owners selection.
C. Patterns: As shown on Material Finishes schedule on drawings.
Earthwerks, Bradford Plank (color and pattern as selected by owner).
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 VINYL FLOORING 09651-2
Construction Luxury Vinyl Plank with square edges Size 4" W x 36" L(101.6 mm x 914.4 mm) Overall Thickness .080 (2.0 mm) Wearlayer Thickness .012 inches (0.30 mm) Weight Per Piece 0.95 lbs. (.43 kg) Static Load Limit 750 psi Specification (ASTM 1700) Class 3, Type B – Embossed Surface Heat Stability (ASTM F-1514) Passes Stain and Chemical Stability (ASTM F-925) Passes HUD/FHA Requirements Exceeds Flooring Radiant Panel (ASTM-E-648) ≥.45 watts/cm², Passes (Class 1) N.B.S. Smoke Chamber (ASTM-E-662) <450 – Passes Installation Adhesive Porous Sub-Floor V-82 / Full Spread Installation Adhesive Non-Porous Sub-floor V-95 / Full Spread (Must use V-95 for heavy rolling loads) Warranty Limited 10 Year Commercial Warranty
1. Verify substrate (concrete) is dry per ASTM F-1869 3lbs. maximum MVTR or ASTM F-2170 75% maximum relative humidity.
2. Meets the Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines for static coefficient of friction as manufactured.
3. Meets CHPS 01350 Indoor Air Quality, Passed and Listed.
4. Dirt, wetness, finish selections and maintenance schedule may cause significant variation in actual performance.
2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products listed: 1. Refer to finish schedules on sheets A2.4 for the Pool Equipment and Pavilion buildings. 2. Refer to finish schedule on Sheet A3.0 for the Units.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement- based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 VINYL FLOORING 09651-3
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish or width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Vinyl plank treatment: 1. Provide sealers and cleaners material as recommended by the vinyl plank manufacturer.
F. Applicator shall furnish for approval, material specifications together with catalogs, MSDS and supporting data for the product.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Flooring contractor shall examine subfloors and report defects which have to be corrected before application of flooring starts. Cuts, scrapes, etc. in gypcrete is not to be considered a defect and Contractor is expected to fill as required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lay out planks from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tile widths at opposite edges or room are equal tone another and are at least one-half of a plank. B. Match planks for color and pattern by selecting plank from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Install all joints tight, floor true, level and even. Cut to and around permanent fixtures. C. Use cutting tools which produce true and square cuts. D. Apply floor plank polish as recommended by flooring manufacturer and as instructed by polish manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09651
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data and ADA product compliant documents.
B. Submit three (3) sets of shop drawings, showing layout of seams, all edge conditions, and conditions where joined or butted to adjacent materials.
C. Submit three copies of manufacturer's maintenance manual.
D. Seam layout: Contractor to submit his proposed seam layout per apartment type prior to the start of installation.
E. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
F. Submit Samples for Verification: 24" x 24”sample of each different color and pattern of carpet selected, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristic.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpet and carpet cushions that have flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 25 or less and 450 or less, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84. than 0.45
B. Carpet Critical Radiant Flux Classification: [Class I, not less THAN 0.45 w/sq. cm per ASTM E 6481 [Class II, not less than 0.22 w/sq. cm per ASTM E648
C. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6, "Site Conditions”.
D. Installer shall be approved by the manufacturer and experienced in carpet installation for at least five (5) years. The actual work shall be performed by qualified and experienced mechanics working under his supervision, who also have been performing this type work for five (5) years.
E. Notice is hereby made that strict adherence to this specification will be required by the Owner and that the Contractor shall certify that all materials supplied against this contract meet or exceed the standards established under "Products, and are guaranteed free from manufacturing defects for five (5) years or term specified by manufacturer, whichever is greater.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 5 CARPET 09680-2
1.4 TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. Successful bidder shall furnish three (3) copies of test results by an independent testing laboratory of tests made for each of the performance criteria herein listed. The Owner, at his option, may order additional tests made on any portion of furnished fabric for conformance with his criteria. These tests, if ordered, will be at the expense of the Owner; if material is noncompliant with specifications, successful bidder will bear all testing costs.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Carpet: Deliver to Owner full-width carpet equal to 2 percent of each type and color carpet installed, packaged with protective covering for storage.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver carpet to the jobsite in original mill wrappings with each roll having its register number properly attached, clearly marked as to size, dye lot, and materials.
B. Material shall be stored in an enclosed and dry area protected from damage and soiling. Coordinate location of storage area within building with General Contractor.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Upon completion, installer shall submit a certificate guaranteeing the installation to be free of defects in workmanship, to include the statement that: The installer shall, at his own expense and upon written notice from the Architect, promptly correct/replace any and all improper work and material that may become apparent within warranty period. Installer shall restretch underlying carpet at the request of the Owner within this guarantee period.
B. Special Project Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: carpet manufacturer shall certify by register and roll numbers that carpet shipped for this project complies with all requirements of the specifications subject to normal manufacturing tolerances.
D. Manufacturer's Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
E. Manufacturer's Stain and Soil Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion
F. These warranties shall not deprive the Owner of other right I s the owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 5 CARPET 09680-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of:
1. Shaw Industries 2. Mowhawk. 3. Bigelow 4. Rosbury, 5. Burlington 6. Mannington 7. Philadelphia 8. Gibraltar 9. Tarkett
2.2 CARPET
A. Type 1 (Units): (CARPET - Refer to Sheets A3.0). Carpet over pad, continuous filament, continuous heat set yarns, soil shield carpet protector, low cut 100% nylon pile, 5.0 pound per cubic foot density rebound pad, three-eighth inch 3/8” thick on all floors. Carpet and Pad thicknesses and densities shall meet ADA standards.
a. Refer to the Materials Finishes schedule shown on the drawings.
B. Colors: (1) standard color in living units as selected by Architect. A special color and pattern to be selected for the Clubhouse / Lease areas.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Gripper strips: exterior grade nine-thirty-seconds inch (9/32") plywood or pine strips with three (3) rows of seven-thirty-seconds inch (7/32” high zinc-coated pins protruding upward at sixty (60) degree angle.
B. Brad over all tacks where exposed to foot traffic. Exposed metal at all 3 bathrooms. M-D Z-Bar (11-001) @ doors and openings.
C. Roppe - Vinyl Carpet transition & Edging #41: at all carpet to dissimilar material transition. Provide type and size as required for transition and meet ADA requirements glue down carpet to dissimilar material transition. Color as selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Report to the General Contractor and Architect, in writing any imperfections, unacceptable conditions, and/or corrections required to be made before commending work of this section.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 5 CARPET 09680-4
Commencing of work of this section denotes acceptance of installer of all surface and conditions affecting the work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. The subcontractor will scrape floors, patch all defects with latex floor patch stone, mechanically grind floor smooth and sweep floor clean before installing padding and carpet. In no case will any foreign matter remain under padding and carpet.
B. Remove doors necessary for execution of work and place them in an orderly fashion to prevent damage. After completion, replace doors in original location and in original condition.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104, "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip".
B. Verify with the owner prior to beginning installation, all edging techniques, lines of demarcation between carpeted and hard surfaced floor areas, and treatment at doors and thresholds.
C. All areas under carpet will be completely covered with pad and no trafficable concrete surfaces will be allowed to wear against carpet.
D. Install carpet to within one-fourth inch (1/4”) of walls to allow for carpet re-stretching.
E. Hand sew or hot-iron seams in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Special care will be taken at all seams to prevent them from being visible from the top side.
F. Stretch carpet tightly and attach securely to tackstrip at walls to prevent Bubbles, wrinkled or loose carpet.
G. Install carpet free of wrinkles.
H. For a period of one year provide any re-stretching required due to material characteristics or improper installation.
I. Power stretching may be omitted in most cases, unless required to facilitate proper installation of the carpet.
J. Install edge strips where carpeting abuts other flooring including door openings where thresholds are not indicated. Secure edge strips with countersunk flat head stainless steel screws in shields at 12" on center maximum.
K. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 5 CARPET 09680-5
3.4 FINISHED INSTALLATION
A. Finished appearance shall be smooth, level, free from misalignment, neatly cut and closely fitted at projections and openings, with joints as close, and inconspicuous as possible.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove spots immediately with cleaner or solvent recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Vacuum clean and cover with nonstaining, protecting materials in traffic areas.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Prepare maintenance program:
1. Schedule: specify frequency with each cleaning activity is to be performed. 2. Equipment: Specify each piece of equipment and tool included in total carpet maintenance program using generic language or by manufacturer name. 3. Materials: clearly identify every material or chemical required to properly maintain facility by brand name, source, quantities, and proper solutions.
3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall remove all waste and excess materials, all tools and equipment, and shall carefully and thoroughly vacuum the entire floor surface with an upright beater-bar type vacuum cleaner to the Owner's and Architect’s satisfaction.
END OF SECTION 09680
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 5 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
1. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of paint indicated.
2. Submit Samples for Verification: Submit for selection and approval manufacturer's standard color chips for each type of paint specified. After color selection and approval, submit samples of each type and color of paint applied to specified wood, metal, stucco, drywall and unit masonry. Match approved samples precisely for color and sheen.
3. Application procedure and materials: Submit for approval manufacturers published application procedures, and a list of materials proposed for each coat, including names and numbers of each product.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Comply with the following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. Federal Specifications (FS).
3. All products shall meet federal standards for low VOC.
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work shall include but is not limited to the following:
1. The term "paint', as used herein, includes emulsions, enamels, Paints, varnishes, stains, oils and other coatings whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.
B. Paint all exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 11 PAINTING 09900-2
C. Do not paint pre-finished items, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, labels, and materials obviously intended to be left exposed such as brick and tile. Do not paint concealed surfaces, with the following exceptions:
D. Label mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
E. Paint the back side of access panels.
F. Surfaces to be painted: Complete coverage of all exposed surfaces is intended. Without restricting the extent of work to be performed, work shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Ferrous metal: all exposed surfaces of all ferrous metal work, including galvanized, exterior of building which is not finish painted under other sections. 2. Gypsum drywall: all exposed surfaces. 3. Plaster: all exposed surfaces. 4. Wood: all exposed surfaces. 5. Metal clad doors: faces and all edges. 6. Cementitious fiber board siding and trim. 7. Additional items to be painted: Pool Equipment Room and TEAL Building concrete floors.
G. Surfaces Not to be Painted: the following areas or items:
1. Duct shafts, concealed pipes and ducts. 2. Stainless steel and aluminum. 3. Acoustical tile and suspension system. 4. Manufactured items with acceptable factory finish. 5. Concrete floors, walks, terraces, etc. 6. Areas scheduled for other finishes (i.e., vinyl wall covering). 7. Plumbing stacks. 8. Door hardware and hinges.
1.6 SURFACES TO RECEIVE WORK
A. Surfaces shall be smooth, even, sound, thoroughly clean and free of defects which would adversely affect application of this work. Moisture content of masonry, concrete and plaster surfaces shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%). Use a moisture meter to determine degree of moisture prior to painting. Thoroughly wash surfaces containing excess alkalinity as recommended by paint manufacturer. Surfaces which do not meet the tolerances of quality requirements imposed within the specifications governing substrate construction shall be repaired or replaced prior to initiating this work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Install window glazing, sealing, exterior doors, and all roofing completely, prior to application of this work. Mask, cover and protect by removal, if necessary, adjacent materials and surfaces.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 11 PAINTING 09900-3
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Paint: Deliver to owner a 5 1-gal. (3.8-L) containers properly labeled and sealed, of each color and type of finish coat paint used on Project.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature in building at constant 65 degrees Fahrenheit or above during drying of materials, and provide adequate ventilation for escape of moisture from building to prevent mildew, damage to other work, and improper drying of paint. Once painting has commenced, provide constant temperature of 65 degrees Fahrenheit or above, and prevent wide variations in temperature which might result in condensation on freshly painted surfaces.
B. Exterior painting shall not be performed with temperature below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, while surface is damp, during cold, rains or frosty weather, or when temperature is likely to drop to freezing within 24 hours. Avoid painting surfaces while they are exposed to hot sun.
C. During period of inclement weather, painting may be continued by enclosing surfaces with temporary shelters and applying artificial heat, provided temperature requirements are maintained.
D. Cleaning area: before painting is started in any area, it shall be broom cleaned and dust shall be removed from all areas to be painted. After painting operations begin in a given area, broom cleaning will not be allowed. Cleaning shall then be done only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment.
E. Illumination: provide adequate illumination in all areas where painting operations are in progress.
F. Drop cloths: protect adjacent areas and installation by use of drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall promptly correct any work rejected by the Owner or the Architect as defective or as failing to conform whether observed before or after substantial completion and shall correct any work found to be defective or nonconforming within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion of the entire project or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents.
B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 11 PAINTING 09900-4
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Paint Products:
a) Devoe Paint (Devoe) Regency Paint & Primer. b) Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore) Aura® Waterborne Exterior Paint. c) PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) Manor Hall® Timeless® Exterior Paint. d) Pratt and Lambert (P & L) Accolade® Exterior Acrylic. e) The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) Duration® Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint. (SuperPaint® Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint at cement fiberboard siding & trim) f) Sherwin Williams H&C Shield-Crete® Water-Based Epoxy Garage Floor Coating.
2. Exterior and Severe Exposure Ferrous Metal Paints and Coatings: a) Ameron. b) Tnemec. c) Valspar. d) The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
2.2 PAINT
A. Provide manufacturer's premium grade paint material of the various coating types specified for exterior.
B. Provide manufacturer's contractor grade paint material of the various coating types specified for interior.
C. Use only products manufactured by the same manufacturer for succeeding coats after application of a primer or first coat.
D. Provide well ground paint, free from caking, thickening or settling in the container readily broken with a paddle to a smooth consistency.
E. Deliver paint to the project site ready-mixed, in selected colors.
F. Provide fungicidal agent incorporated into all paint by manufacturer.
G. All products shall meet federal standards for low VOC.
2.3 PUTTY AND SPACKLE
A. Provide putty and spackle type and product recommended by manufacturer of finishing product.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 11 PAINTING 09900-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, environmental and substrate conditions, product mixing, and application.
3.2 PREPAPATION
A. Apply paint to surfaces which are smooth, even sound, thoroughly dry and clean, and free of defects which would adversely affect application of paint.
B. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Remove fins, projections, protruding nails or other metal fastenings, and loose or foreign materials. Remove mortar splatters from exposed block by dressing down with a carborundum block.
2. Patch large openings and holes with portland cement mortar; and after priming, fill remaining small depressions with a vinyl emulsion compound to match texture of surface as approved by the painting manufacturer.
3. Remove form oil from concrete by washing with Xylol.
4. Provide a zinc-chloride-phosphoric acid pretreatment for concrete surfaces receiving eggshell or enamel paint.
C. Woodwork: sand surfaces to achieve smooth finish. Prime wood to be painted after drying, patch surface imperfections, cracks, holes, nail holes, and joints with putty, tinted to match finish. Touch-up knots and areas of high pitch content with shellac. Prepare surfaces to receive transparent finishes prior to applying first coat.
D. Exterior exposed wood: prepare surface to eliminate all voids, knots, holes, miters, blemishes. Paint one coat undercoat primer and/or sealer and one coat finish coat (no bleed though accepted).
E. Metal: wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove grease, oil, and dirt. Wire brush or sand surfaces to remove rust and scale. Touch-up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer. Pre-treat galvanized metal with acid-bound resinous or crystalline zinc phosphate preparations in accord with manufacturer's directions.
F. Sealants: Apply sealants specified in Section 07920 prior to painting of stucco, plaster, concrete, and masonry. Prime ferrous metals receiving sealant primed and abrasions to primer touched up prior to sealant application.
G. Drywall: fill minor irregularities with spackling compound. Sand to smooth, level surface. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper. Apply knock down texture as selected by Owner.
H. Wood to vinyl trim: Joints shall be sealed by painting contractor in accordance with Section 07920.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 5 of 11 PAINTING 09900-6
I. Time between surface preparation and painting: surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and/or otherwise prepared for painting shall be given a coat of specified first-coat material as soon as practical after such preparation has been completed, but in any event, prior to any deterioration of prepared surface.
J. Painting interior doors: paint all door edges top, bottom and door faces, to be primed and painted.
K. Paint all exposed devices unless not permitted by code.
3.4 APPLICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Perform work using experienced, skilled painter in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. Mix and thin paint only as prescribed by the paint manufacturer.
B. Apply paint using brush or rollers, except for metal clad doors which shall receive spray application. Application methods used shall provide complete coverage, uniform colors, specified thicknesses, desired sheen, and approved texture. Cut-in edges by brush next to trim, abutting items and internal corners. Repaint any surfaces where differences occur in coverage or where surfaces contain runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles, or stipples.
C. For each coat of paint, use slightly different shade than preceding coat to distinguish various colors.
D. Sand wood surfaces between each coat. Dust and apply succeeding coats.
E. Apply succeeding coats only after paint is thoroughly dry, in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions.
F. Seal tops and bottoms of all doors. Finish side edges of doors same as faces of doors.
G. Before painting, remove or provide ample protection of hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items. Replace items when painting is completed.
H. At completion of work, touch-up and restore field painted finish where damaged prior to occupancy.
I. Refinish a whole wall rather than spot-finish where a portion of finish has been damaged or is unsatisfactory.
J. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting wall. Paint separately and reinstall after all paint is dry.
K. Workmanship for exterior painting: exterior doors shall have tops, bottoms, and side edges finished the same as exterior faces of these doors.
L. Workmanship for interior painting: sand enamel or varnish finish applied to metal with fine sandpaper and then clean between coats to produce an even, smooth finish.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 6 of 11 PAINTING 09900-7
M. Use a mildew resistant paint on all exterior ceilings. 3.5 MIXING
A. Quality: at time of application, paint shall show no signs of hard settling, excessive skinning, layering, or other deterioration.
B. Consistency: paint shall be thoroughly stirred, stained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application.
C. Prohibited mixing: paint of different manufacturers shall not be mixed together.
D. Thinning: where necessary to suit conditions of surface, temperature, weather, and method of application, packaged paint may be thinned immediately prior to application in compliance with the manufacturer's directions but not in excess of 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. Use of thinner for any reason shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding.
E. Colorant: primer may be tinted with a colorant recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Refer to Paint Schedule at end of this Section.
B. Coverage: the covering shall be complete regardless of the number of coats applied.
3.7 TOUCH-UP
A. Before finished floor: touch-up missed and weak areas, re-rolling walls where needed. Touch-up all window sills, enameled areas, ceilings, etc., where needed. Touch-up any damaged areas and remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, splattered, or over- sprayed.
B. Before Final Clean: touch-up all areas, latex and enamel to ensure consistent and shadow- free. Touch-up all base, trim, doors, and any areas where needed.
C. Exterior: touch up any defects and missed areas after all trades are finished.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean up debris caused by work of this section, keeping site and buildings neat at all times. All debris is to be removed from jobsite as buildings are completed, floors will be scraped of paint and left broom clean after all painting is completed.
B. The finish work surfaces of other trades shall be protected during painting and shall have those surfaces cleaned where damaged by paint. Where it is impossible to satisfactorily clean these surfaces, they shall be replaced by the applicable trade and charged to this subcontractor.
C. Cloths and cotton waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers or destroyed at end of day. Upon completion of work, all staging, scaffolding, and
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 7 of 11 PAINTING 09900-8
containers shall be removed from site or destroyed in an approved manner. Paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and entire job left clean and acceptable.
3.9 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Cement Fiberboard Panel
1. Acrylic Latex Systems 2. Flat Finish: a) 1st coat: Exterior masonry primer (3.6 dry mil per coat) Loxon Masonry Primer b) 2nd coat: Exterior latex flat (1.3 dry mil per coat) The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) Duration® Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint. (SuperPaint® Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint at cement fiberboard siding & trim)
B. Plaster Refer to Section 09963 Elastomeric Coatings
C. Acrylic Primed Metal (Refer to Division 5 sections for scope: Metal Fabrications, Steel Stairs, Guardrails, Handrails, Gates and Fences)
1. Acrylic Special Coating
a) Semi-Gloss Finish 1) lst Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial™ Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer Primer (4.0-6.0 dry mils film thickness) 2) 2nd Coat: Sherwin Williams Sher-Cryl High Performance Acrylic (minimum 5.0 mils DFT)
NOTE: 1st coat shop prime at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry film thickness and field paint the finish in one or two coats to achieve a minimum 5.0 mils DFT.
D. Ferrous Metal (unless shop primed)
1. Alkyd Enamel: 2 coats over primer 2. Semi-Gloss Finish a) lst Coat: Alkyd enamel primer b) 2nd Coat: Industrial enamel
E. Metal-Clad Doors
A. Enamel: 2 coats over primer Semigloss Finish 1. lst Coat: Enamel primer 2. 2nd Coat: Enamel
Note: Spray or brush application.
F. Galvanized Metal
A. Alkyd System Semi-Gloss Finish
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 8 of 11 PAINTING 09900-9
1. lst Coat: All-purpose metal primer 2. 2nd Coat: Industrial enamel
G. Wood - Opaque Finish (Smooth) A. Alkyd Enamel: 2 coats over primer Satin Finish 1. 1st Coat: Alkyd enamel primer 2. 2nd Coat: Alkyd enamel
H. Cedar - Opaque Finish (Smooth) Alkyd Enamel: 2 coats over primer Satin Finish a) lst Coat: Alkyd enamel primer b) 2nd Coat: Alkyd enamel
I. Wood – Stain Finish Acrylic Polyurethane Water Base: 2 coats a) 1st Coat: Acrylic Polyurethane stain b) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish
J. Cedar Fence – Stain Finish Acrylic Polyurethane Water Base: 1 coat c) 1st Coat: Acrylic Polyurethane semi transparent stain
3.10 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B. Masonry (CMU – Concrete Block)
1. Latex Systems – (Normal Exposure) 2. Flat Finish a) 1st coat” Interior / Exterior Block Filler B25w25 (75-125 sq. Ft./Gal) 3. Latex Systems – (Severe Exposure) 4. Egg-Shell Finish b) 1st coat” Epoxy Filler / Sealer c) 2nd coat: Latex (4 mils Wet, 1.3 Mils Dry per Coat.
C. Metal - (Galvanized)
1. Latex Enamel Systems 2. Eggshell Finish a) lst Coat: Latex Enamel (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) b) 2nd Coat: Latex Enamel (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)
D. Metal - Miscellaneous Steel
1. Latex Enamel Systems 2. Eggshell Finish a) 1st Coat: Acrylic Primer/Finish (6 mils wet, 3 mils dry) b) 2nd Coat: Latex Enamel (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 9 of 11 PAINTING 09900-10
E. Drywall - (Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board)
1. Latex Systems 2. Flat Finish a) lst Coat: Latex Wall Primer (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) b) 2nd Coat: Latex (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)
F. Opaque Finish Wood - (Doors, Windows, Trim)
1. Latex Systems 2. Semi-gloss Finish c) lst Coat: Latex Wall Primer (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) d) 2nd Coat: Latex (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)
G. Pool Equipment Room and TEAL Building concrete floors 1. Sherwin Williams H&C Shield-Crete® Water-Based Epoxy Garage Floor Coating. 2. Water-based Epoxy Garage Floor Coating. (mil thickness and application as recommended by paint manufacturer)
H. Drywall at Bathrooms
1. Enamel Systems 2. Semi-Gloss Finish a) 1st Coat: Enamel (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) b) 2nd Coat: Enamel (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry)
3.11 COLOR SCHEDULE
Refer to Interior Designer Color Schedule.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 10 of 11 PAINTING 09900-11
END OF SECTION 09910
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 11 of 11 SECTION 10431 SIGNS AND AWNINGS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Submit Shop Drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
C. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts and samples showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each type of product indicated.
D. Submit Samples for Verification: Full-size samples of each different type of sign specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. A-1 Sign Company. 2. ASI. 3. Classic Signs and Graphics. 4. Kroy Sign Systems. 5. Mohawk Sign Systems. 6. SEGUIN CANVAS & AWNING
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. Oversized Back Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with oversized back panels in contrasting color; comply with the following requirements for materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Acrylic plastic. 2. Layer Thickness: 3/16-inch. 3. Corner Condition: Square corners. 4. Back Panel Size: 1/4-inch larger than face panel on each edge. 5. Colors: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. Panel to be composed of two layers of contrasting-color plastic with contrasting-color vinyl letters applied. 6. Applied Copy: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. 7. Apply copy to the exposed face of the sign panel.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 SIGNS AND AWNINGS 10431-2
8. Letter Height: 3/4-inches. 9. Symbols: Manufacturer's standard handicapped symbols.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
A. Cutout Letters and Numbers: Cut letters and numbers from solid plate material of thickness indicated. Produce precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 1/2-inch. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard organic coating of thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system, medium gloss. 4. Letter Style: Roman. 5. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturer's standard adhesives and fasteners to properly attach signs to indicated substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.
C. Panel Signs: Attach unit signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below:
1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.
D. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect signs after installation.
B. Remove and replace signs that are broken or damaged in any way, natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 SIGNS AND AWNINGS 10431-3
3.3 SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Verify all signage meets all local codes.
B. Building Identification Signs: 12" dimensional numbers. Verify exact location with the fire marshal and building officials.
C. Building Address Signs: 6" x 12" panel signs.
D. Living Unit Signs: 2" x 4" panel signs.
E. Restroom Signs: 6” x 12”panel signs with male or female symbol 'wheelchair" handicapped symbol where required.
F. Sprinkler Riser Closet Signs: 6” x 12" panel signs. Verify exact location, color and size with the fire marshal and building officials
END OF SECTION 10431
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire extinguishers; fire blankets; fire extinguisher cabinets; and brackets for wall mounting.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims. 2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 3. Section 6200: Execution requirements for placement of rough-in frame for cabinets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 10 applicable code.
B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for purpose specified and indicated.
C. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets classified and labeled by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for purpose specified and indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, location, fire ratings, and color.
C. Product Data: Submit extinguisher operational features, color and finish and anchorage details.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10523-2
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge schedules and re- certification requirements.
C. Fire extinguisher inspection dates are to be no more than 30 days from the date of installation.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature is capable of freezing extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. JL Industries Model FE10 - Cosmic 10E with MB84 - 4A-60BC. 2. JL Industries Model 5E - with J hook bracket. 3. Larson’s Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (acceptable substitution) 4. Kidde Fire Extinguishers (acceptable substitution) 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Texas and Municipality of Midland standards.
C. Dry Chemical Type: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B: C, Size size and classification as scheduled.
D. Extinguisher Finish: Steel enamel to color as selected.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: 1. JL Industries Model – Ambassador. Surface mounted. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Metal: Formed sheet steel, primed 0.036 inch thick base metal.
C. Configuration: Surface type, sized to accommodate accessories.
D. Trim Type: Returned to wall surface.
E. Door: reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch lock with full glass access.
F. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick polycarbonate.
G. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10523-3
H. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim.
I. Pre-drill for anchors.
J. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Furnish nylon roller type catch.
K. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
L. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.
M. Finishing Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
N. Finishing Cabinet Interior: white enamel.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, white enamel.
B. Graphic Identification: to meet local fire code.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
D. Position cabinet signage as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Fire extinguisher and cabinet at Pavilion, Pool maintenance: Locate where shown on plans or as directed by Fire Official.
B. Fire extinguisher with bracket only (JL Industries model Cosmic 5E) having a minimum rating of 2-A:10-B:C, at all apartment units: Locate as directed by Fire Official.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 10550 MAILBOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
1. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of postal specialties. Include plans, elevations and large scale details. 2. Show anchorages and accessory items. 3. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish major components and accessories of postal specialties by one manufacturer.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors and application of postal specialties units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. American Locker Security Systems. 2. Auth-Florence Manufacturing. 3. Cutler-Federal, Inc. 4. Hudson Lock Inc. 5. American Mailbox. 6. Salsbury Industries.
2.2 MAILBOXES
A. Loading Type: Manufacturer’s standard extruded aluminum unit braced and framed to hold box doors in the mater front. Provide continuous stainless steel piano hinges on one side and solid closure for back of mail compartments. Fabricate unit so that door remains open while mail is deposited. Furnish with clear anodized finish.
B. Locking: construct unit to receive locking unit provided by local postmaster for use by letter carriers.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 MAILBOXES 10550-2
C. AF Florence Manufacturing Company: Series – versatile® 4C front load Mailbox, (2) 4C16D-20 Max Frame Height (20 tenant doors, 2 parcel doors) plus (1) 4C16S-09 Max Frame Height (9 tenant doors, 1 parcel door)
(USPS STD- 4C Parcel Box: 3” H x 12” W x 15”D Standard Compartment, Parcel Locker 15” H x 12” W x 15” D)
Color: Postal Grey
1. Material: extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Identification: furnish doors with engraved laminated plastic numbers. 3. Coordinate numbering system with postal service and obtain owner approval. 4. Locking: furnish 5 pin tumbler cylinder lock capable of at least 1,000 key changes, with 2 keys for each box door. Key each box differently and master key. Deliver box keys and master keys to Owner's Representative with record of each corresponding lock and key numbers.
D. Parcel boxes: one for every ten units/ 1:10 ratio (as required by United States Postal Service.) Provide 49 unit boxes minimum plus 5 parcel boxes minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which postal specialties are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units complying with manufacturer's instructions, U.S. Postal Service requirements and final Shop Drawings approved by Architect.
B. Final acceptance will be contingent upon compliance with U.S. Postal Service requirements.
END OF SECTION 10550
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10673 WIRE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. ClosetMaid. 2. LeeRowan.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wire Shelving: Provide ventilated wire shelving constructed of Grade C-1008 bright, basic, cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi. Steel wire shall be resistance welded at intersections of cross-deck wires spaced at 1-inch increments and trimmed smooth.
B. Finish: manufacturer's standard baked-on non-toxic epoxy coating.
C. Color: White.
D. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard hardware for mounting wire shelving to drywall partitions without the use of concealed structural members. Provide white color.
2.3 SHELVING SCHEDULE
A. Closets: 12-inch combination shelf and continuous rod (2 rods where shown on plans). B. Laundry, Linen, and Pantry: 12, 16 & 18-inch shelves (refer to plans).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing and painting of surfaces to receive shelving systems before installation of shelving.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 2 WIRE SHELVING 10673-2
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wire shelving using fasteners appropriate to substrate according to manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install shelving level, firmly anchored in locations, and at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 10673
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's literature showing the full range of products and finishes available for each type of product indicated.
B. Submit Samples for Verification: Full-size samples of each different type of toilet accessory specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and anchorages: furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into framing for the installation of toilet accessories. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Obtain from one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Coordinate with Architect and owner for acceptable designs and finishes.
D. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units are not permitted, except where otherwise specified.
E. Provide locks where specified, with the same keying for accessory units in the project wherever possible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Taymor Bobrick. Bradley. ASI-American Specialties Hafele (HEWI) Better Home Products (BHP) Moen Eva Creative Specialties International
2.2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Refer to the Toilet and Batch Accessories Schedule at the end of this Section. B. Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide a minimum of 6 keys to Owner.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which toilet accessories are to be installed. Record in writing, conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units using fasteners appropriate to substrate (Solid wood blocking). Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations, and at heights indicated. Comply with provisions of ADA and ADAAG for installation of units required to be accessible to the disabled.
B. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
C. Provide anchors, bolts, and other necessary fasteners, and attach accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed.
D. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same material as the accessories or of galvanized steel.
E. Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories.
F. Secure toilet room accessories to adjacent walls and partitions complying with the manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.
G. Install all accessories at locations, at heights, and in quantities as indicated on Drawings.
1. Mounting heights: in toilet rooms designed for the handicapped; mount applicable accessories at heights required by local, state, and federal codes. Refer to the Fair Housing Design Manual and Accessible Standards in Drawings.
H. Where no mounting height is given, install accessories on solid backing according to manufacturer's recommendation.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect toilet accessory units after installation.
B. Remove and replace toilet accessory units that are damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
3.4 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings for locations and mounting heights.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-3
Bath Accessories:
TA-01 Toilet Paper Holder (Single) – Moen ISO Collection, Brushed Nickel [DN0709BN] metal surface-mounted single-roll toilet tissue holder, one per bath at units. TA-02 Medicine Cabinet – refer to Section 06410 Cabinetwork – one per bath at units. TA-03 Towel Bar – 18” Moen ISO Collection, Brushed Nickel [YG0718BN] metal, one per bath at units. TA-03a Towel Bar – 24” Moen ISO Collection, Brushed Nickel [YG0724BN] metal, one per bath at units. TA-04 Robe Hook – Moen ISO Collection, Brushed Nickel [DN0703BN] one per bath at units. TA-05 Shower Rod - Aluminum adjustable curved shower rod, 1", one per tub. TA-06 Hand-Held Shower Head – Refer to plumbing drawings. TA-07 36" Grab Bar - 1-1/4” diameter x 3' peened surface stainless steel grab assembly with concealed anchor plates and mounting screws and escutcheons, at handicap accessible baths and toilets. TA-08 42" Grab Bar - 1-1/4” diameter x 3’-6" peened surface stainless steel grab assembly with concealed anchor plates and mounting screws and escutcheons, at handicap accessible bath and toilets. TA-09 24" Grab Bar - 1-1/4” diameter x 2’ peened surface stainless steel grab assembly with concealed anchor plates and mounting screws and escutcheons, at handicap accessible baths and toilets. TA-10 12" Grab Bar - 1-1/4” diameter x 1’ peened surface stainless steel grab assembly with concealed anchor plates and mounting screws and escutcheons. TA-11 Bathtub and Shower seats – ADA complaint supplied by owner. TA-12 Toilet Paper Holder (Double) – Public Toilet surface-mounted double-roll. TA-13 Toilet Paper Holder (Single) – one each at all bath rooms TA-14 Paper Towel Dispenser/Trash Receptacle – Public Toilet Recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle, Bobrick TrimLine Series [B-36903], stainless steel, at each public toilet room. TA-15 Soap Dispenser – Lavatory-mounted soap dispenser, plastic and chrome-plated metal at public toilet room. TA-16 Mirror - Refer to Section 08800 Glazing. TA-17 Paper Towel Dispenser - Surface-mounted paper tower dispenser, stainless steel at public toilet room.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 11150 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes parking gate access and exit devices, controllers, and barriers; and preformed steel curb frames.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design: Protect against interference or damage by lightning or other electrical influence; include fuse, over-voltage protection, flash-over protection, and line filter.
B. Entry - Automatic Gate Control: Electrically operated with remote device. Activate automatic gate reversing switch when obstacle is sensed in motion.
C. Exit - Automatic Gate Control: Electrically operated with remote device. Activate automatic arm reversing switch when obstacle is sensed in motion.
D. Entry – Siren operated automatic gate control to meet local fire department requirements. Activate automatic gate reversing switch when obstacle is sensed in motion.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout of equipment access lanes, curbing, mounting bolt dimensions, conduit and outlet locations, power requirements, wiring diagrams, and controls.
C. Product Data: Submit data on operating equipment, characteristics and limitations, operating temperature ranges, and function.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-2
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating data for operating equipment, changing security access code, and remote device programming. Submit lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate placement of equipment and steel curb, frames and anchors.
C. Coordinate placement of conduit and accessories and power wiring to operating equipment and signage.
D. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for control and motor equipment.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of operating equipment for period of two years from Date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Linear Gate Control Equipment Model: AE2000Plus: Commercial Telephone Entry System with Access Control 2. Linear Long Range Receiver Model: RRR Long Range Receiver 3. Linear Remote Model: ACT31B Remote
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-3
B. ELITE Gate Motor – ½ H.P. with battery backup and all necessary product (loop detector, 911 equipment, fire department controls, etc.)
C. Furnish materials in accordance with State and Municipality standards.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; galvanized to G90.
2.3 VEHICLE DETECTION COMPONENTS
A. Vehicle Detection: For use in temperature range of -40 to 160 degrees F; to consist of detector unit in conjunction with sensing loop to activate gate when vehicle is in the path of the gate.
B. Loop Wire: 14 gage, XHWN or THWN copper; loop size of 48 x 72 inches.
C. Loop Groove Fill: Same material as pavement.
D. Install all wiring in conduit located under paving and in wall (exposed conduit not acceptable).
E. Siren operated automatic gate control to meet local fire department requirements.
2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Requirements for electrical characteristics.
B. Section 16225 - Motors: Requirements for motors.
C. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Gate Posts and Cabinets: Baked enamel on steel, color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify anchor bolts, curbs and paving are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 ENTRY GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-4
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with shop drawing location.
B. Cut grooves in pavement surface, install vehicle detection loops and lead-in wires, and fill grooves with loop groove fill.
C. Install internal electrical wiring, conduit, junction boxes, transformers, circuit breakers, and auxiliary components required.
D. Install all wiring in conduit located under paving and in wall (exposed conduit not acceptable).
E. Install Work in accordance with State and Municipality.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Adjust system components for smooth operation.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstrate system to Owner's personnel.
END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 11451 APPLIANCES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data. Specifications and installation details, indicating type, size, finish, and thickness of materials. Color photos required of each type of unit.
B. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Eurotech 2. General Electric/Hotpoint 3. Whirlpool/Roper 4. KitchenAid 5. Viking 6. Perlick 7. Kenmore
B. APPLIANCES:
Apartment Units: All appliances shall be Energy Star rated. Appliances for Standard Apartment and Fair Housing Units
1. Refrigerator:
All Units – GE 25 Cu. Ft. Side by Side Refrigerators Model GSE25GSHSS with Ice Maker, Stainless Steel finish.
2. Range: GE 30” Free-Standing Self-Clean 6.6 cu. ft. double oven Electric Convection Range with Ceramic Glass Cooktop, Model JB860SJSS, Stainless Steel finish.
3. Range Hood – GE Wall Mount Chimney Hood Model JVW5301SJSS, external venting.
4. Microwave Oven: GE Drawer Type under counter Microwave Model ZWL1126SJSS, Stainless Steel finish.
5. Dishwasher: GE, Built-in Dishwasher Model GLDT696TSS, Stainless Steel finish.
6. Dryer: GE 7.0 Cu. Ft. Capacity Electric Dryer Model GFDN110ELWW
7. Washer: GE 3.6 Cu. Ft. Capacity Washer Model GFWN1100HWW
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 3 APPLIANCES 11451-2
8. Stackable Washer and Dryer: GE GEFLSTACK part no. WE25X10018 Stack Kit for Washer/Dryer noted above. Refer to unit plans for locations of stacked washer and dryers.
9. Disposal – GE Large Capacity Continuous Feed GFC525V, 1/2 Horsepower.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation, verify that appliances may all be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations; notify the Architect in event of a discrepancy; do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine appliances for damage upon receipt with construction superintendent and replace all items damaged or defective.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install appliances in strict accordance with the manufacturer's current recommendations.
1. Ranges:
a. Deliver, distribute, uncrate, and install ranges in space provided in each individual apartment unit. Connect range cord to energy supply provided by Contractor. Provide Range cord. b. Install range level, flush, and stable with all accessories attached properly, and anti- tip devices in place.
2. Refrigerators:
a. Deliver, distribute, uncrate, and install refrigerators in space provided in each individual apartment unit and Clubhouse location. b. Connect refrigerator to energy source provided by general contractor. c. Install refrigerator to energy source provided by general contractor.
3. Dishwasher:
a. Deliver and distribute dishwashers at the instructions of the job superintendent. b. Inspect dishwashers with Plumber and "turn-over" responsibility to Plumber after dishwasher make-ready.
4. Disposal:
a. Mark apartment number of each disposal and deliver to plumber in 4 building increments.
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 3 APPLIANCES 11451-3
5. Combination Microwave/Hood:
a. Deliver, distribute, and install combination microwave/hoods in space provided in each individual apartment unit.
6. Washer and Dryers:
a. Deliver, distribute, uncrate, and install refrigerators in space provided in each individual apartment unit location. b. Connect refrigerator to energy source provided by general contractor. c. Install refrigerator to energy source provided by general contractor.
7. Non-vented Hood:
a. Deliver, distribute, and install combination hood under wall cabinet above range.
B. Clean-up: clean up all debris caused by the work of this section and remove from the job site. Periodic clean up is to be performed so as to keep the site and buildings clean as outlined in Paragraph 01060, Page 4 of the General Requirements.
C. Securely anchor built-in appliances to supporting cabinetry or with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.
D. Place freestanding appliances in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
E. Provide serial number of each appliance in each apartment on a per building basis.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect appliances after installation.
B. Remove and replace appliances that are broken or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation and connection of equipment, put each item through a complete operating cycle and verify that all equipment is properly installed and properly operating; verify that all trim is in place; adjust all components as necessary to ensure continued proper operation; remove all labels from equipment and remove all packing materials from the jobsite.
END OF SECTION 11451
Mission Crossing November 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 3 SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data and color Samples.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for blinds. Indicate materials, finishes, construction, and installation instructions. Include manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance and cleaning.
C. Samples: Submit full size sample indicating top and bottom hardware, tracks, cord and ladders, and minimum 1-foot length of slat. Submit manufacturer's color sample chips for color selection by the Owner.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate fasteners, installation methods and clearances at head, jamb and sill. Indicate installation of blinds to windows and doors with dimensions of all components.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect blinds during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Deliver blinds to Project Site in manufacturer's original packaging.
C. Handle and store to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Blinds: Furnish quantity of typical units equal to 2% of amount installed, consisting of a mix of each size blind.
B. Provide blinds identical to those tested and. passed according to NFPA 701, as determined by UL or another testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with AWCMA Document 1029.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Royal Windows, Inc., 2” Stock Faux Wood Blinds 2. Bali Blinds 2” Faux Wood Blinds
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 1 of 4 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491-2
3. Levolor 2” Visions Faux Wood Blinds 4. Substitutions as required by section 1600.
B. Must conform to US CPSC child safety guidelines.
C. Characteristics: Provide each blind as complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fasteners.
2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - (Fixed and Operable Windows and Patio Doors)
A. Headrail: Manufacturer's standard headrail consisting of channel-shaped section fabricated from minimum aluminum with round edges at top. Increase metal thickness for large blind thickness as recommended by manufacturer. Furnish complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation indicated.
B. Bottom Rail: Manufacturer's standard Trapezoid PVC Bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Top surface to match slat, with flat bottom. Close ends with manufacturer's standard end caps, of same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide hold down clips at all door installations.
C. Slats: Manufacturer's standard, 2”-inch Flat PVC Foam Slats.
1. Slat Width: 2”-inch Flat PVC Foam Slats, with other components sized to suit.
2. Colors: Selected from manufacturers Premium and standard product.
D. Ladders: Manufacturer's standard ladder construction designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and closed positions, as follows:
1. Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.045- inch nor more than 0.066-inches in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less than 4 threads. Space ladders not further than 21-inches apart and 7-inches from ends of slat.
E. Tilting Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard assembly including low friction gear tilter, drum, and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and grommet guide to prevent wear on ladder and cords; all designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows:
1. Wand Operation: Manufacturer's standard, detachable, clear plastic wand of proper length to suit blind installation and to provide convenient operation.
F. Lifting Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard including crash-proof cord locks with cord separators and braid polyester of nylon lift cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type. Include cord equalizers of self-aligning type designed to maintain horizontal blind position. Must conform to US CPSC child safety guidelines.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 2 of 4 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491-3
G. Installation Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include all hardware necessary for secure attachment of brackets to adjoining construction and to head rails. Design brackets to support safely the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds.
H. Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match rail color. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant finish to concealed items of hardware.
1. Steel Components: Galvanize and either phosphate coat or prime exposed steel surfaces, followed by manufacturer's standard baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish coat.
2. Aluminum components: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish system consisting of chemical conversion coating followed by baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION GENERAL
A. Verify actual opening dimensions by jobsite measurements.
B. Fabricate actual for openings indicated, from head to sill and jamb to jamb.
C. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions for proper fit at all openings. Cooperate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces.
D. Space slats to provide overlap for light exclusion when in fully closed position.
E. For continuous window wall installations, fabricate blinds so that ends occur only over mullions or other defined vertical separation, unless otherwise indicated. For window openings nine 9-feet or larger provide double stacking center opening blinds.
3.2 FABRICATION GENERAL - HORIZONTAL BLINDS
A. Fabricate window treatment components from non-corrosive, non-staining, non-fading materials which are completely compatible with each other, and which do not require lubrication during normal expected life.
B. Equip horizontal blind units, unless otherwise indicated, for the following operation.
1. Full tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180-degrees. Place tilt operating on left-handed side of blind units.
2. Full height raising cord locks for stopping blind at any point of ascending or descending travel.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds after wall finishing and soffit is completed.
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 3 of 4 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491-4
B. Install blinds in all windows and doors plumb and in accord with manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings. Provide intermediate support for blinds greater than 2-feet in width.
C. Adjust operating mechanisms for proper operation. Clean exposed surfaces prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
D. Install window treatment units in manner indicated to comply with manufacturer's instructing. Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other related work. Securely anchor units with proper clips, brackets, and anchorages, suited to the type of mounting indicated.
E. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds.
F. Divisions between blinds are permitted only at mullions by continuous windows or openings where more than one blind for one opening occurs, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or thick coating or other means approved by the Architect.
H. Protect installed units to ensure their being in perfect operating condition, without damage, or indication of use at completion of project. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by Architect and Owner.
END OF SECTION 12491
Mission Crossing December 2016 Sage Architecture, Inc. Page 4 of 4 SECTION 21 1300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm. B. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 2. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for approval and fire sprinkler permit prior to submitting to Engineer. Submit proof of AHJ/permit approval at time of shop drawing submission to Engineer. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site. B. Conform to UL requirements. C. Design and Install system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer or licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. D. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment: 1. Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products 2. Viking Corporation 3. Reliable Sprinkler 4. Approved Substitution: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for building area(s) as required by code. B. Occupancy: Comply with applicable provision(s) of NFPA 13 and 13R as applicable. C. Interface system with building fire alarm system.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 D. Provide fire department connections as required by code and/or indicated on plans. E. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. 2.03 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with matching push on cover plate. B. Exposed Area Type: Pendant upright type with guard. C. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. D. Residential Sprinklers: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push on estucheon plate. E. Storage Sprinklers: Concealed upright type with guard. F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. 2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Fire Department Connections: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. D. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. E. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. F. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. G. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. H. Install guards on sprinklers where required. I. Hydrostatically test entire system. J. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Piping: Pipe markers. B. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling. 2.02 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.03 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. 2.04 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. B. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. D. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 1 SECTION 22 0716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2004. B. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. C. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008. D. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007. E. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2008. F. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2008a. G. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2009. H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. I. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. J. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation 2. Johns Manville Corporation 3. Owens Corning Corp 4. CertainTeed Corporation 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible. 1. 'K' Value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 1. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C 592; rigid, noncombustible. 1. 'K' Value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2.04 CELLULAR GLASS A. Manufacturer: 1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation: www.pittsburghcorning.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 2. 1. 'K' Value: 0.41 at 100 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F. 2.05 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3, in sheet form. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. D. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. E. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004. B. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008. C. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007. D. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007. E. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008. F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. G. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. 2.03 CELLULAR GLASS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation: www.pittsburghcorning.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1. 1. 'K' value: 0.37 at 100 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F. 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch. 4. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum. 2.04 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply. 2. Domestic Cold Water: END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Storm water. 4. Gas. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching. D. Section 33 1300 - Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution. E. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. F. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels. G. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. H. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. I. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. J. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004). B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18). D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). E. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). G. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. H. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010. I. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. J. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009. K. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007. L. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. M. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002. N. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 9 O. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005. P. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009a. Q. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). R. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2009. S. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003. T. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2009b. U. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). V. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008. W. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009. X. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009. Y. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009. Z. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2009. AA. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2009. AB. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004. AC. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 2008). AD. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). AE. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). AF. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005. AG. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004 AH. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. AI. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2006. AJ. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010. AK. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009. AL. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 9 AM. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2006. AN. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008. AO. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002. AP. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. AQ. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of the project's, standards. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX). 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of the proejct's plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. C. PVC Solid Core Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 9 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. PVC Solid Core Pipe: ASTM D2729. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.04 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F441/F441M, or ASTM F442/F442M. 1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439. 2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. 2.05 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. PVC Solid Core Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.06 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. PVC Solid Core Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.08 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 9 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.09 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 2. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized. 3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel. 5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 5 of 9 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Achors: Compying with ICC-ES AC308. 2.11 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. 1, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. C. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. 1, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.12 GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. 1, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. C. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. 1, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.13 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. kbi: www.Kbico.com 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Construction, 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 6 of 9 2.14 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com. 2. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. 3. Wilkin's Regulator Company: www.wilkinsregulator.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. C. Over 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.15 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. b. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labelled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 3100. H. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. I. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 2316. J. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 2323.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 7 of 9 K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. M. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. N. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. O. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. P. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. Q. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 1300. B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 8 of 9 F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved water meter with by-pass valves as required. C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial maximum pressure of 11 inch wg. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. 3.08 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch. e. Pipe size: 8 inches to 12 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 7/8 inch. 2. Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 9 of 9 SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Hose bibbs. D. Hydrants. E. Backflow preventers. F. Water hammer arrestors. G. Interceptors. H. Thermostatic mixing valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures. C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Roof Drains: 1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Galvanized cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws. 4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to architectural: a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Controlled flow weir. f. Leveling frame. g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension. C. Roof Overflow Drains: 1. Galvanized cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended to daylighted discharge at location indicated on plans.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 4 D. Area Drains: 1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Galvanized cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Round nickel-bronze. 4. Accessories: Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop, with levelling frame. E. Floor Drain: 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas: 1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. C. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover. 2. PVC female adapters with PVC finish plug. D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Galvanized cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. E. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.03 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Arrowhead Brass: www.arrowheadbrass.com 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrowhead Brass Company: www.arrowheadbrass.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Arrowhead Brass: www.arrowheadbrass.com 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Wall Hydrants: 1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker. 2.05 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Oatey: www.oatey.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Valve Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 4 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3. Oatey: www.oatey.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for 2 inch waste, slip in finishing cover. 2.06 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX A. Box Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Oatey: www.oatey.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Valve Manufacturers: 1. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3. Oatey: www.oatey.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip in finishing cover. 2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.08 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Double Check Valve Assemblies: 1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. 2.09 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. 2.10 MIXING VALVES A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 4 a. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com. b. Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment. B. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Delta Faucet Company: www.deltafaucet.com. b. H.G. Specialties: www.hgspec.com. c. CFG by Moen: www.cfgonline.com d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel cylinder, integral temperature adjustment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. G. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 4 SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. B. UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 CERTIFICATIONS A. Water Heaters: NSF approved. B. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com. B. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage. B. Performance: Refer to schedule on drawings. C. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 240 volts, single phase. D. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box . Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously. F. Accessories: Provide: 1. Water Connections: Brass. 2. Drain Valve. 3. Anode: Magnesium 4. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. Service sinks. E. Electric water coolers. F. Bathtubs. G. Showers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors. B. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties. D. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, floor mounted, siphon jet flush action, china bolt caps. 1. Flush Volume: 1.6 gallon, maximum. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Operation: Manual, oscillating handle. 4. Handle Height: 44 inches or less. 5. Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. b. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. c. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 5 d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor-Operated Type: Solenoid operator, low voltage hard-wired, infrared sensor and over-ride push button. 2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. b. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. c. Moen: www.moen.com d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Seats: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company: www.bemismfg.com. b. Church Seat Company: www.churchseats.com. c. Olsonite: www.olsonite.com. d. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS A. Tank Type Water Closet Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. ProFlo: www.proflo.com 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, vitreous china reverse trap, close-coupled closet combination with regular rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps. 1. Water Consumption: Maximum 1.6 gallon per flush. C. Seat Manufacturers: 1. Bemis Manufacturing Company: www.bemismfg.com. 2. Church Seat Company: www.churchseats.com. 3. Olsonite: www.olsonite.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, complete with self-sustaining hinge. 2.03 LAVATORIES A. Lavatory Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Pro-flow: www.proflow.com 4. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. C. Steel Counter Top Basin: ASME A112.19.4M; porcelain on steel self-rimming counter top lavatory, drillings on 4 inch centers, front overflow, soap depression, seal of putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket. D. Vitreous China Counter Top Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china self-rimming counter top lavatory, drillings on 4 inch centers, front overflow, soap depression, seal of putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 5 E. Supply Faucet Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Pro-flow: www.proflow.com 3. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 4. cfg by Moen: www.cfgonline.com 5. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with pop-up waste, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 2.2 gallons per minute, indexed handles. G. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, deck mounted with sensor located on neck of spout. 1. Spout Style: Standard. 2. Power Supply: 24 VAC. a. Cord and plug. b. For 24V applications, provide transformer. 3. Mixing Valve: Internal, automatic. 4. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections. 5. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM, laminar flow device. 6. Finish: Polished chrome. 7. Sensor Operated Faucet Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. b. The Chicago Faucet Company: www.chicagofaucets.com. c. Moen Incorporated: www.moen.com. d. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. e. Zurn industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. H. Accessories: 1. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 2. Wheel handle stops. 3. Carrier: a. Manufacturers: 1) JOSAM Company: www.josam.com. 2) Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 SINKS A. Sink Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 20 gage thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 1-1/2 inch chromed brass drain. C. Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 20 gage thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 1-1/2 inch chromed brass drain. D. Enamelled Bowl: ASME A112.19.4M; steel, porcelain enamelled, single compartment, self-rimming and undercoated, with 3-1/2 inch diameter crumb cup and chromed brass tailpiece, ledge back drilled for trim. 2.05 BATHTUBS AND SHOWERS A. Bathtub Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 5 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Hamilton: www.hamiltonbathware.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Bathtub: 1. ANSI Z124.1.2; molded glass fiber reinforced polyester, with slip-resistant bottom surface, contoured shape, color as selected. C. Bath and Shower Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower and over rim supply with diverter spout, pressure balanced mixing valve, bent shower arm with adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.5 gallons per minute flow and escutcheon, lever operated pop-up waste and overflow. 2.06 SHOWER RECEPTORS A. Solid Surfacing Shower Receptors: Solid plastic resin casting, self-supporting, for installation over conventional subfloor; complying with ANSI Z124.1.2. 1. Material: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. 4. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 5. Manufacturers: a. Transolid, Inc: www.transolid.com. b. Sterling, Inc.. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Drain Trim: Removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece. 2.07 SHOWERS A. Shower Manufacturers: 1. Sterling, Inc. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Cabinet: ANSI Z124.1.2 reinforced glass fiber, 32 by 32 by 75 inches with stone texture, integral receptor, soap dish, integral seat, removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece, color as selected. C. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixing valves, integral service stops, bent shower arm with adjustable spray ball joint shower head with maximum flow, and escutcheon. D. Shower Head: 1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket, built-in 2.5 gpm flow control. 2.08 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Electric Water Cooler Manufacturers: 1. Tri Palm International/Oasis: www.tripalmint.com. 2. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Water Cooler: Electric, mechanically refrigerated; surface handicapped mounted; stainless steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push button, mounting bracket; integral air cooled condenser and stainless steel grille. 1. Capacity: 8 gallons per minute of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80 degrees F and room temperature of 90 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 18.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 5 2. Electrical: 115 V, 60 Hertz compressor, 6 foot cord and plug for connection to electric wiring system including grounding connector. 2.09 SERVICE SINKS A. Bowl: 36 by 24 by 10 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer. B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges. C. Accessories: 1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose. 2. Hose clamp hanger. 3. Mop hanger. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components level and plumb. B. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 9005, color to match fixture. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 5 of 5 SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single phase electric motors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 - 2010. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characteristics. B. Construction: 1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency. D. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.02 APPLICATIONS 2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. 2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Air Handling and Condensing Units: Nameplates. B. Thermostats: Nameplates. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5. Letter Color: White. 6. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 7. Background Color: Black. 8. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. 2.03 TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.04 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. B. Duct Liner. C. Insulation jackets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2008. C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2009. D. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985 (Reapproved 2007). E. ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings; 2008. F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. G. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). H. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. I. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. J. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation; ______: www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2.04 JACKETS A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. B. Mineral Fiber (Outdoor) Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50 lb/square. 2.05 DUCT LINER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite. 1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21. 2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 3. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: B. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air: C. Outside Air Intake Ducts: D. Plenums E. Supply Ducts: F. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors: END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping. B. Refrigerant. C. Moisture and liquid indicators. D. Valves. E. Strainers. F. Filter-driers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. B. Section 23 6213 - Packaged Air-Cooled Refrigerant Compressor and Condenser Units. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 495 - Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2005. B. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2009. C. AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007. D. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007. E. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. F. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). G. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006. H. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006. I. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. J. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005. K. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2008. L. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Liquid Indicators: 1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. B. Valves: 1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors. 2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet. C. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. D. Strainers:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 4 1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer. E. Filter-Driers: 1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators. F. Receivers: 1. Use on systems with long piping runs. G. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper. 2. Joints: Flared. C. Pipe Supports and Anchors: 1. Conform to ASME B31.5. 2.02 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: Refer to Schedules as defined in ASHRAE Std 34. 2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi. 2.04 VALVES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. B. Packed Angle Valves: 1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C. Ball Valves: 1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F. D. Service Valves: 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 4 2.05 STRAINERS A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.06 FILTER-DRIERS A. Performance: 1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: As indicated in schedule, minimum, rated in accordance with AHRI 710. 2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator capacity. 3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum. B. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines. C. Construction: UL listed. 1. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type. 2.07 EXPANSION VALVES A. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well. B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. 2.08 RECEIVERS A. Internal Diameter 6 inch and Smaller: 1. AHRI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psi maximum pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve. B. Internal Diameter Over 6 inch: 1. AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1); 400 psi with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and magnetic liquid level indicator. 2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 4 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 4 SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonmetal ductwork. B. Casing and plenums. C. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories. C. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005. B. SMACNA (FGD) - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. F. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Fibrous Glass Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation at beginning of installation. E. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with draw bands. F. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backdraft dampers - metal. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Combination fire and smoke dampers. D. Duct access doors. E. Fire dampers. F. Flexible duct connections. G. Smoke dampers. H. Volume control dampers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. B. NFPA 92A - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pressure Differences; 2009. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. 2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - FABRIC A. Fabric Backdraft Dampers: Factory-fabricated, 18 gage, galvanized steel frame. 1. Blades: Neoprene coated fabric material. 2. Birdscreen: 1/2 inch nominal mesh of galvanized steel or aluminum. 3. Maximum Velocity: 1000 fpm (5 m/sec) face velocity.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 4 2.04 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated. C. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper. D. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. E. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return pneumatic type suitable for operation on 0-20 psig instrument air. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper operator on interior of duct and link to damper operating shaft. F. Normally Closed Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, opening by gravity upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure. G. Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices to ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally. H. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled. 2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Elgen Manufacturing: www.elgenmfg.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. C. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. D. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. E. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. F. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 4 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 2.08 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. C. Dampers: UL Class 1 curtain type fire damper, normally open automatically operated by pneumatic actuator. D. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled. 2.09 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw . D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 2. Blade: 24 gage, minimum. E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 1. Blade: 18 gage, minimum. F. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 4 C. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. F. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 4 SECTION 23 3416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backward inclined centrifugal fans. B. Forward curved centrifugal fans. C. Motors and drives. D. Fan accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers. B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008). B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010. C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51). D. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amca.org/licenses/search.aspx. E. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation: www.acmefan.com. B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WHEEL AND INLET A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate, backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 B. Forward Curved: Black enamelled steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; steel hub swaged to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screw. 2.03 HOUSING A. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut 2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES A. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, selfgreasing ball bearings, with ABMA 9 life at 50,000 hours. B. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. C. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid Fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. D. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded to inlet bell. B. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid. C. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance. C. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. D. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 23 3300. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers. D. Roof hoods. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carnes Company HVAC: www.carnes.com. B. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. C. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. D. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar shall project not more than 1 inch above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque. B. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish. C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish. D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.04 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, two-way deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.05 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. 2.06 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, single deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.07 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.08 LOUVERS A. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake. B. Fabrication: 16 gage thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Mounting: Furnish with interior flat flange for installation. 2.09 ROOF HOODS A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; birdscreen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake, and factory prime coat finish.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 23 8127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forced air furnaces. B. Air cooled condensing units. C. Indoor air handler (fan & coil) units for duct connection. D. Controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008. B. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004. C. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15). D. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010. E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. F. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. D. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Filters: One for each unit. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Heating: Electric resistance heating.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 2. Cooling: Outdoor electric condensing unit with evaporator coil in central ducted indoor unit. 3. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. B. Performance Requirements: See Drawings for additional requirements. 2.02 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTED SYSTEMS A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating and cooling element(s), controls, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Air Flow Configuration: Horizontal. 2. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. B. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley. 1. Motor: NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm single speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted. 2. Motor Electrical Characteristics: C. Air Filters: 1 inch thick urethane, washable type arranged for easy replacement. D. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan sloped in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve. 1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL listed. 2. Manufacturers: System manufacturer. 2.03 OUTDOOR UNITS A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and condenser. 1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed. B. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. C. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves. D. Operating Controls: 1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. 2.04 ELECTRIC FURNACE COMPONENTS A. Electric Heater: Helix wound bare nichrome wire heating elements arranged in incremental stages of 5 kW each, with porcelain insulators. B. Operating Controls: 1. Heater stages energized in sequence with pre-determined delay between heating stages. 2. High limit temperature control to de-energize heating elements, with automatic reset. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding components. B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal frame of the building. 3. Concrete-encased electrode. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. 2. Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Rod Electrodes: Copper. 1. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 2. Length: 10 feet. C. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. B. Wire: Stranded copper. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 B. Install 4 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated. C. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together. D. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. B. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010 C. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009. D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps. 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. D. Fastener Types:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types: As required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005. D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. H. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and conduit bodies. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 B. Underground Installations: 1. More than 5 Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or plastic coated conduit. 2. Within 5 Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or plastic coated conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch. C. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. D. In Slab Above Grade: 1. Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch; 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or nonmetallic tubing. F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or nonmetallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type. 2.07 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.08 NONMETALLIC TUBING A. Description: NEMA TC 2. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101. C. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 0529. H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. I. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. J. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. K. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. M. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. R. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0526. W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 26 0536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cable trays and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. B. NEMA FG 1 - Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993 (R98). C. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray. B. Material: Formed sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M, painted with gray epoxy. C. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches on center. D. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. E. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover. 2.02 TROUGH-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C trough type tray. B. Material: Formed sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M, painted with gray epoxy. C. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. D. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover. 2.03 SOLID-BOTTOM-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C solid bottom cable tray. B. Material: Formed sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M, painted with gray epoxy. C. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. D. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 2.04 CHANNEL-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C, solid bottom channel type cable tray. B. Material: Formed sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M, painted with gray epoxy. C. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. D. Covers: Flanged, solid cover. 2.05 FIBERGLASS LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA FG 1, Class 20C ladder type tray. B. Material: Fiberglass. C. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches on center. D. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, and connectors. E. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover. 2.06 FIBERGLASS SOLID-BOTTOM-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA FG 1, Class 20C solid bottom cable tray. B. Material: Fiberglass. C. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, and connectors. D. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover. 2.07 FIBERGLASS CHANNEL-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA FG 1, Class 20C, solid bottom channel type cable tray. B. Material: Fiberglass. C. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, and connectors. D. Covers: Flanged, solid cover. 2.08 WARNING SIGNS A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following wording: "WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1. B. Install fiberglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1. C. Support trays in accordance with Section 26 0529. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of ____ ft maximum. D. Use expansion connectors where required. E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 26 0526. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. 2. Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond to each component.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 3. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors. F. Install warning signs at 50 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 26 0537 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 2716 - Cabinets and Enclosures. C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726. 2.02 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-1/2 inches deep. B. Material: Cast metal. C. Shape: Round.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 D. Service Fittings: As specified in Section 26 2726. 2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 2716. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. D. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC". E. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side. 2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717. D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726. G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Z. Set floor boxes level. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Voltage markers. E. Underground warning tape. F. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2007. B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2007. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. C. Buried Electrical Lines: Underground warning tapes. D. Communication Cabinets: Nameplates. E. Conduit: Conduit markers. F. Electrical Distribution and Control Equipment Enclosures: Nameplates. G. Junction Box Load Connections: Wire markers. H. Outlet Box Load Connections: Wire markers. I. Panel Gutter Load Connections: Wire markers.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 J. Pull Box Load Connections: Wire markers. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Materials: 2. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. 2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. G. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS A. Minimum Size: B. Legend: C. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. D. Description: Cloth type conduit markers. E. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet. F. Spacing: 20 feet on center. G. Legend (as applicable): 1. 240 Volt System 2. Fire Alarm System 3. Telephone System 2.05 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil. C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. D. Color: 2.06 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: 2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Switchboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance. D. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 400 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards (ANSI); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2007. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006). C. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011. D. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007 E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified. B. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 C. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. D. Bus Material: Copper, standard size. E. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. F. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses, type as specified. G. Fusible Switch Assemblies, 800 Amperes and Larger: Bolted pressure contact switches. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class L fuses. H. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. 2. Include shunt trip where indicated. I. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: With replaceable current limiting elements; UL listed. 1. Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 2. Include shunt trip where indicated. 2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. See Section 26 4300 for factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices. List and label switchboards containing surge protective devices as a complete assembly including surge protective device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 400. C. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. D. Install fuses in each switch. E. Identify switchboards in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.02 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Load centers. D. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision D, 2006. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2009. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. G. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 5 2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. F. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. G. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. H. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As indicated. I. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, _____ inches deep, _____ inches wide, cabinet box. J. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 5 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. F. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. G. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. H. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated. I. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. J. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for 480 volt panelboards. K. Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.05 LOAD CENTERS A. Description: Circuit breaker type load centers listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Bus Material: Aluminum or copper. C. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic plug-in type. D. Enclosures: 1. Provide flush-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide circuit directory label on inside of door or individual circuit labels adjacent to circuit breakers. 2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 5 a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install panelboards plumb. F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. K. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1. L. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. N. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. O. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 0553. P. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. Q. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit breakers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 5 C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 5 of 5 SECTION 26 2701 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metering transformer cabinets. B. Meter bases. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards: Metering transformer compartment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 120/240 volts, single phase, two-wire, 60 Hertz. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with Utility Company representative. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company:Coordinate all aspects of electrical service entrance inclusive of but not limited to transformer, transformer pad, secondary feeders/conduits; any and all requirements of the utility company related to contractor's scope of work, and include all of the relative costs in initial bid. Failure to comply with this requirement will not constitute grounds for a change order. B. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility company requirements, with provisions for locking and sealing. B. Meter Base: Furnished by utility company. C. Other Components: As required by utility company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install service rack, weatherhead, transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company. B. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 1 SECTION 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. C. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. C. Cabinet Keys: Deliver to Owner in accordance with Section 01 6000 for maintenance materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.02 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. C. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. E. Keys: Provide two of each different key. 2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. D. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Raceway: Plastic channel with hinged or snap-on cover. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner under the provisions of Section 26 0529. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit. B. Section 26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Disconnect Switches: As specified on the drawings and in individual equipment sections. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates. E. Floor box service fittings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding. B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 5 6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units. E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. F. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed in kitchens. G. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. H. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. I. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors. J. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors. 2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 1. All Wiring Devices: White with white nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2. Access Floor Boxes: Gray wiring devices with gray steel cover with insert to match floor covering. 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Pass and Seymour: www.passandseymour.com. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2.05 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 5 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 2. Pass and Seymour: www.passandseymour.com 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings. 2.06 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Pass and Seymour: www.passandseymour.com 3. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Pass and Seymour: www.passandseymour.com 3. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Weatherproof Covers for Wet or Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected. 2.08 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0537 with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 5 E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. I. Unless otherwise indicated, GFI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFI protection. J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. K. Install wall switches with OFF position down. L. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. M. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. N. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 5 B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 5 of 5 SECTION 26 2817 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision D, 2006. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in enclosures. B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Short Circuit Current Rating: E. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 F. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: H. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Interrupting Capacity: 1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. C. Conductor Terminations: 1. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. D. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 2.04 TRIP UNITS A. Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breaker as scheduled with electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing; instantaneous trip. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Enclosures: 1. Fabricate enclosures from steel. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish, gray color. B. Provide accessories as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed circuit breakers securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for circuit breakers used for service entrance and for circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers. E. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. F. Inspect and test each circuit breaker. G. Inspect each circuit breaker visually. H. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker. I. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position. J. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. K. Include description of testing and results in test report. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 26 2818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007). B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006). C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install enclosed switches plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. H. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. I. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated components. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent dimming ballasts and controls. F. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. G. Lamps. H. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. B. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. E. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 4 E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. 2.02 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. 2.03 FIXTURE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. 2.04 EXIT SIGNS A. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. B. Exit Signs: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency lighting unit. 1. Provide fixtures complying with NFPA 101. 2. Lamps: Compact fluorescent. 3. Mounting: As indicated. 2.05 BALLASTS A. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. 2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS A. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Compatibility: 1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits. C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. D. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 4 2.07 LAMPS A. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. B. Lamp Types: As specified for each fixture. 2.08 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting). F. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Install plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with each other; secure to prevent movement. G. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Fixtures: 1. Install at locations indicated on reflected ceiling plan. 2. Support fixtures larger than 2 by 4 feet in size independent of ceiling framing. 3. Fixtures Recessed in Ceilings: Install to permit removal from below. 4. Lay-In Ceiling Mounted Fixtures: a. Support fixtures of all sizes independently of the grid, anchored directly to building structure. b. Install clips to secure fixtures in place. 5. Fixtures Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. 6. Suspended Fixtures: Install using pendants supported from swivel hangers, with pendant length as required for indicated height. H. Wall Mounted Fixtures: Install at height as indicated on the drawings. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Emergency Lighting Units: M. Exit Signs: N. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units: O. Install lamps in each luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 4 B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000. D. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. E. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. D. Aim and adjust fixtures as indicated. E. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES 3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 4 SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires. B. Ballasts. C. Lamps. D. Poles and accessories. E. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008). B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height. 2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IESNA LM-63 standard format upon request. 2. Lamps: Include rated life and initial and mean lumen output. 3. Poles: Include information on maximum supported effective projected area (EPA) and weight for the design wind speed. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 3 3. Extra Ballasts: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type. 4. Extra Fuses: Five percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type. 5. Touch-Up Paint: 2 gallons, to match color of pole finish. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations, luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. 2.03 BALLASTS A. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. 2.04 LAMPS A. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. 2.05 POLES A. All Poles:
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 3 1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed. 2.06 ACCESSORIES END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 3 SECTION 28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access control devices. B. Access control panel. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Security Access System: Control access to building using coded key pads: 1. Selected Exterior Doors: Control access into building. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Provide system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required. C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM A. Access Control System: Control access to building using encoded cards: 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Security Access Control Panel B. Key Pad Units C. Motion Detectors D. Manual Stations E. System Cable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit. C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices furnished and installed under Section 08 7100. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing, and to train Owner personnel.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. C. Furnish service and maintenance of security access system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 28 1600 INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Intrusion detection devices. B. Alarm control panel. C. Signaling devices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. C. Section 28 1300 - Access Control 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Intrusion Detection System: Protect building and selected areas from intrusion during SECURE hours as follows: 1. Exterior Windows . 2. Exterior Doors . 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required. C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall-mounted enclosure. B. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours. C. System Supervision: Provide electrically-supervised system, with supervised alarm initiating and alarm signaling circuits. Component or power supply failure places system in alarm mode. D. Initiating Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication. E. Signal Circuits: Supervised zone coded signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode and does not disable that circuit from transmitting alarm. F. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver. G. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 2 H. Occupied/Unoccupied Selector. I. Entry and Exit Time Delays. J. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of intrusion detecting device places system in alarm mode, which causes the following operations: 1. Sound and display local alarm signaling devices with non-coded signal. 2. Transmit non-coded signal to municipal connection. 3. Indicate location of actuated device on control panel and on remote annunciator panel. 2.02 INITIATING DEVICES A. Door Contacts B. Motion Detectors C. Glass Break Detectors 2.03 SIGNAL DEVICES A. Alarm Bells: NFPA 72, electric vibrating, 8 inch bell with operating mechanism behind dome. Sound Rating: 81 dB at 10 feet. B. Remote Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator including audible and visual indication of intrusion by zone, and audible and visual indication of system trouble, in flush wall-mounted enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use 18 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit. C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices furnished and installed under Section 08 7100. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000. B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72. 3.03 MANUFACTURER SERVICES A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative to prepare and start systems. 1. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing, and Owner training. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. C. Provide service and maintenance of intrusion detection system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 2 SECTION 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station. C. Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit. D. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Electrically operated locks and door holder devices to be monitored and released by fire alarm system. C. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devices installed in sprinkler system. D. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by fire alarm system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; 2010. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of designer qualifications. C. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: 1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. 5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit programming. 6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated. 8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and circuit length limitations. 9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating adequate battery power. 10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract documents.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1 of 6 12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents. D. Evidence of installer qualifications. E. Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline. F. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer. G. Inspection and Test Reports: 1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out. H. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same manuals. 3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. 4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. 5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. 6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling. I. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones. 2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. 3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart, and voice messages by event. J. Closeout Documents: 1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. 3. Maintenance contract. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. C. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified qualifications.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 2 of 6 D. Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and able to provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Control Units: Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design product, products of the following are acceptable: 1. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Notifier: www.notifier.com. 2. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Silent Knight: www.silentknight.com. 3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc: www.sbt.siemens.com. 4. SimplexGrinnell: www.simplexgrinnell.com. 5. Provide all control units made by the same manufacturer. B. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: 1. Same manufacturer as control units. 2. Provide all initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. For other acceptable manufacturers of control units specified, submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with contract documents. 2. For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed, submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with contract documents. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal. c. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction, which is ______. d. Applicable local codes. e. The contract documents (drawings and specifications). f. NFPA 101. g. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 4. Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones; allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. 5. Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated, with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor, on the floor above, and the floor below. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by Owner. 8. Hearing Impaired Occupants: Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 3 of 6 9. Fire Command Center: Location indicated on drawings. 10. Master Control Unit (Panel): New, located at fire command center. 11. Combined Systems: Do not combine fire alarm system with other non-fire systems. B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. 2. On-Premises Supervising Station: Existing proprietary station operated by Owner, located at ______. 3. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A. 2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Within Single Building: Class B, Style 0.5. 3. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Between Buildings: Class A, Style 2. 4. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources: 1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary: Storage batteries. 3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. 4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water control valves. 2. Dry-pipe sprinkler system pressure. 3. Dry-pipe sprinkler valve room low temperature. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water flow. 2. Duct smoke detectors. C. HVAC: 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers indicated; shut down air handlers indicated. D. Doors: 1. Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door, upon alarm from manual pull station on same floor, and upon sprinkler activation on same floor. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. 2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Master Control Unit: As specified for Basis of Design above, or equivalent. D. Initiating Devices: 1. Manual Pull Stations 2. Smoke Detectors 3. Duct Smoke Detectors E. Notification Appliances: 1. Horns/Bells 2. Strobes F. Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 4 of 6 G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. H. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. I. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. 1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. 2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. 3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. 4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.03 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel: 1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system. 2. Classroom Instruction: Owner furnished classroom, on-site or at other local facility. B. Administrative: One-hour session(s) covering issues necessary for non-technical administrative staff; classroom: 1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout. C. Basic Operation: One-hour sessions for attendant personnel, security officers, and engineering staff; combination of classroom and hands-on: 1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout. D. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenance data available during instruction. 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 5 of 6 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty period, to include the work described below. C. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner: 1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract. E. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule. F. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit. G. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security. END OF SECTION
Mission Crossing December 2016 PHA Consulting Engineers, Inc 6 of 6